Agilen t Tech n ologies 8935 Ser ies E 6380A
CDMA Cellu la r /P CS Ba se St a t ion Test Set
Refer en ce Gu id e
F ir m w a r e Ver sion : B.03.10 a n d a bove
Agilent Part Number E6380-90019
Revision F
P r in t ed in UK
J a n u a r y 2001
Con ten t s
Manufacturer's Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Product Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Agilent Technologies Warranty Statement for Commercial Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
What is in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Which Document is Required? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Trademark Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Changing the Test Set’s Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Changing the Measurement Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
How do I Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Displaying CDMA Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Channel Power, Adjacent Channel Power (ACP), Rho,
Error Vector Magnitude (EVM), Average Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Code Domain Measurements (Power, Fast Power, Power & Noise,
Complex Power, Phase, Timing, Fast Power Synchronization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
I/Q Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
RF Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Displaying AF Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
To display the meter scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
To set the meter’s end points and scale intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Calibrating the Channel Power Measurement – CDMA Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Calibrating the Channel Power Measurement – Code Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Calibrating the Adjacent Channel Power (ACP) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Changing the Increment or Decrement Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using the Factor of 10 Increment/Decrement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
To reset or remove limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3
Con ten t s
To remove a limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting A Measurement Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
To set a reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Averaging Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
To use measurement averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
How the Test Set Averages Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setting an RF Generator/Analyzer Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
To set an RF Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
To save an instrument setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
To recall an instrument setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
To remove (clear) an individual save register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
To clear all save registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Register Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Memory Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Instrument Hardware Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Using USER Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Using Pre-Defined USER Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Assigning and Releasing USER Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Replacing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
4. Over view of t h e Test Set ’s
Bu ilt-In Tools
Loading and Running RF Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Test Results/BTS Utility Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Swept Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Discrete Frequency Insertion Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Swept Insertion Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Swept Return Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Cable Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Replot Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Transfer Stored Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Self Calibration ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Catalog PC (Memory) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Selecting the Code Domain Analyzer’s Controls Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Using the Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Automatic Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Setting Resolution Bandwidth and Sweep Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Selecting the Spectrum Analyzer’s Controls Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Using the Spectrum Analyzer’s Delta Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Using the Spectrum Analyzer Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Using the Voltmeter and Audio Frequency Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Using the Oscilloscope (Scope) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Selecting the Oscilloscope’s Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Selecting the Oscilloscope’s Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Triggering the Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Using the Oscilloscope’s Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
4
Con ten t s
Using IB_UTIL Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
COPY_PL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
FILE_XFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
RAM_USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Securing a Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Clearing RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Using the LISTOPTS (list options) Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Using the ST_PLT (store or plot) Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5. CDMA Mea su r em en ts - Scr een s
a n d Con tr ol F ield s
CDMA Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Average Power Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Channel Power Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Rho Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Error Vector Magnitude (EVM) Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
IQ Constellation Diagram, IS-2000 only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
PN Offset Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
# of Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ACP Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ACP Fltr BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ACP Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
ADCfs or ADC FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Analyzer (CDMA analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Analyzer (code domain analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Anl Dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Anl Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Auto Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Carrier FT or Carrier Feedthru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Chan Num . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
CD pwr unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Chn Pwr Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Even Sec In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Find PN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Freq Err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
5
Con ten t s
Gen Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Input Atten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Input Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Lvl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
I Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Marker Lvl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Marker Pos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Meas Intvl or Meas Int . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Meas Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Num Avgs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Ofs Trnsfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Output Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Phase/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Phse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
PN Incrment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
PN Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
PN Offset or PN Ofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Pwr Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Pwr Intvl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Pwr Ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Pwr Scale – IS-95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Pwr Scale – IS-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Pwr Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Q Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Qual Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rate RC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Rate RC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Rate RC-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
RF Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
RF Gen Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
RF In/Ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Sprd Fact (Spread Factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Start Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Time/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Time Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Time Ofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Trig Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Tune Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Walsh Chan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Walsh Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Analog Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
AC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
AM Depth Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
AF Freq Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6
Con ten t s
DC Level Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Distn (Distortion) Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Frequency Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Frequency Error Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
TX Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
SINAD Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
SNR Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Control Fields for Analog Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
#Pts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
AF Anl In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
AFGen1 Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
AFGen1 To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
AFGen2 Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
AFGen2 To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Atten Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Audio In Lo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Audio Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Auto/Norm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Auto Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
BW= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Center Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Cont/Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
DC FM Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
De-Emp Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
De-Emphasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
EditPt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Ext (TTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Filter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Filter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
FM Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Freq (Delta Mrkr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Freq (mask) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Freq (normal marker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Freq (Ref Mrkr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Gain Cntl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
IF Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Input Atten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Input Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Input Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
7
Con ten t s
Level (div) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Level (mask) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Lvl (Delta Mrkr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Lvl (marker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Lvl (normal marker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Lvl (Ref Mrkr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Marker To Peak+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Marker To Peak- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Marker To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Mask Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Mask Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Mod In To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
No Pk/Avg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Normalize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Norm/Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Notch Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Notch Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Offset Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Output Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Pk Det To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Port/Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Pos/Neg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Ref Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Ref Mrkr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
RF Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
RF Cnt Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
RF Gen Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
RF In/Ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Scope To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Sensitivity (RF analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Sensitivity (spectrum analyzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Settling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Speaker ALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Speaker Vol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Squelch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Time/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Track/Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Trig-Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Tune Freq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
TX Pwr Meas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
TX Pwr Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Vert/div . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Vert Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
8
Con ten t s
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Changing the Beeper’s Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Turning Off User Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Abort Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Antenna In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Base Freq (User Defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Chan Space (User Defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CDMA Std . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Command Escape Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Connection Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Display User Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
FF at Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Frame Clock Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
(Gen)-(Anl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
(Gen)-(Anl) (User Defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
GPIB Adrs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Hold-off Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
IBASIC Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Incoming Call Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Inst Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Lines/Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Modem Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Modem Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Number to Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Opt CDMA TB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Printer Adrs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Printer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Print Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Range Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
9
Con ten t s
Ref Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Remote Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Retries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
RF Chan Std . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
RF Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
RF Gen Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
RF In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
RF Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
RF Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Save/Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Serial Baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Serial_9 In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Serial No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Stop Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Total RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Signaling Encoder and Decoder Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
The Decoder’s Signal Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Decoder Frequency Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
The Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Control and Voice Channel Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Encoder/Decoder Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Interpreting Decoded Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
DTMF Sequence Encoder and Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Measurement Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Function Generator Encoder and Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Decoding Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
AF Anl In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
AFGen2 To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Arm Meas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
B/I Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Bursts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Busy/Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Data (hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Data Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Data Rate (analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
DSAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
DSAT/DST (hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Filler (FOCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Gate Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
10
Con ten t s
Hi Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Message (FOCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Message (FVC) (AMPS-TACS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Message/DST (FVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Num of Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Off Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
On Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Pre-Emp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
SAT Level (FVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Send DSAT (FVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Send Filler (FOCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Send Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Sine Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Single/Cont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Stop DSAT (FVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Stop Filler (FOCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Symbol Frequencies (Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
10 MHz REF OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
16 × CHIP CLOCK 19.6608 MHz OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
ANALOG MODULATION IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
ANT IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
AUDIO IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
AUDIO OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
BASEBAND OUT (I and Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Chassis Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
CHIP CLOCK 1.2288 MHz OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
DATA IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
DUPLEX OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
11
Con ten t s
EVEN SECOND SYNC IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
EXT REF IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
EXT SCOPE TRIG IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
FRAME CLOCK OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
MEMORY CARD Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
PARALLEL 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
PARALLEL 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
RF IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
SCOPE MONITOR OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
SERIAL 9, 10, and 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
TRIGGER QUALIFIER IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
VIDEO OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Agilent Technologies Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Agilent Technologies Manuals (English and Other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Agilent Technologies Test Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Support for Your Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Customer Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
General Information About Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Positive Numbered Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Negative Numbered Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
IBASIC Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
GPIB Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Text Only Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
The Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Non-Recoverable Firmware Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Text Only Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
12
General Information
Manufacturer's Declaration
Ma n u fa ctu r er 's Decla r a t ion
This statement is provided to comply with the requirements of the
German Sound Emission Directive, from 18 J anuary 1991.
This product has the following sound pressure emission specification:
•
•
•
•
sound pressure Lp <70 dB(A)
at the operator position
under normal operation
according to ISO 7779:1988/EN 27779:1991 (Type Test).
Herstellerbescheinigung
Diese Information steht im Zusammenhang mit den Anforderungen der
Maschinenlärminformationsverordnung vom 18 J anuar 1991.
•
•
•
•
Schalldruckpegel Lp < 70 dB(A).
Am Arbeitsplatz.
Normaler Betrieb.
Nach ISO 7779:1988/EN 27779:1991 (Typprüfung).
14
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Manufacturer's Declaration
Sa fety Con sid er a tion s
GENERAL
This product and related documentation must be reviewed for
familiarization with safety markings and instructions before operation.
This product has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC
Publication 61010-1+A1+A2:1992 Safety Requirements for Electrical
Equipment for Measurement, Control and Laboratory Use and has
been supplied in a safe condition. This instruction documentation
contains information and warnings which must be followed by the user
to ensure safe operation and to maintain the product in a safe condition.
SAFETY EARTH GROUND
A uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the main
power source to the product input wiring terminals, power cord, or
supplied power cord set.
CHASSIS GROUND TERMINAL
To prevent a potential shock hazard, always connect the rear-panel
chassis ground terminal to earth ground when operating this
instrument from a dc power source.
SAF E TY SYMBOLS
Indicates instrument damage can occur if indicated operating limits are
exceeded. Refer to the instructions in this guide.
!
Indicates hazardous voltages.
Indicates earth (ground) terminal
WARNING
CAUTION
A WAR NING n ot e d en ot es a h a za r d . It ca lls a t t en t ion t o a
p r oced u r e, p r a ct ice, or t h e lik e, w h ich , if n ot cor r ect ly
p er for m ed or a d h er ed t o, cou ld r esu lt in p er son a l in ju r y. Do n ot
p r oceed b eyon d a WARNING sign u n t il t h e in d ica t ed con d it ion s
a r e fu lly u n d er st ood a n d m et .
A CAUTION note denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operation
procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or
adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the
product. Do not proceed beyond an CAUTION note until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
Chapter 1
15
General Information
Manufacturer's Declaration
Sa fet y Con sid er a t ion s for t h is In st r u m en t
WARNING
Wh en ever it is lik ely t h a t t h e p r ot ect ion h a s b een im p a ir ed , t h e
in st r u m en t m u st b e m a d e in op er a t ive a n d b e secu r ed a ga in st
a n y u n in t en d ed op er a t ion .
If t h is in st r u m en t is t o b e en er gized via a n a u t ot r a n sfor m er (for
volt a ge r ed u ct ion ), m a k e su r e t h e com m on t er m in a l is
con n ect ed t o t h e ea r t h t er m in a l of t h e p ow er sou r ce.
If t h is p r od u ct is n ot u sed a s sp ecified , t h e p r ot ect ion p r ovid ed
b y t h e eq u ip m en t cou ld b e im p a ir ed . Th is p r od u ct m u st b e u sed
in a n or m a l con d it ion (in w h ich a ll m ea n s for p r ot ect ion a r e
in t a ct ) on ly.
No op er a t or ser vicea b le p a r t s in t h is p r od u ct. R efer ser vicin g
t o q u a lified p er son n el. To p r even t elect r ica l sh ock , d o n ot
r em ove cover s.
Ser vicin g in st r u ct ion s a r e for u se b y q u a lified p er son n el on ly.
To a void elect r ica l sh ock , d o n ot p er for m a n y ser vicin g u n less
you a r e q u a lified t o d o so.
Th e op en in g of cover s or r em ova l of p a r t s is lik ely t o exp ose
d a n ger ou s volt a ges. Discon n ect t h e p r od u ct fr om a ll volt a ge
sou r ces w h ile it is b ein g op en ed .
Ad ju st m en t s d escr ib ed in t h e m a n u a l a r e p er for m ed w it h
p ow er su p p lied t o t h e in st r u m en t w h ile p r ot ect ive cover s a r e
r em oved . E n er gy a va ila ble a t m a n y p oin t s m ay, if con t a cted ,
r esu lt in p er son a l in ju r y.
F or Con t in u ed p r ot ect ion a ga in st fir e h a za r d , r ep la ce t h e lin e
fu se(s) w it h T 250 V 5.0 A fu se(s) or t h e sa m e cu r r en t r a t in g a n d
t yp e. Do n ot u se r ep a ir ed fu ses or sh or t cir cu it ed fu seh old er s.
16
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Manufacturer's Declaration
WARNING
Th is p r od u ct is a Sa fet y Cla ss I in st r u m en t (p r ovid ed w it h a
p r ot ect ive ea r t h in g gr ou n d in cor p or a ted in t h e p ow er cor d ).
Th e m a in s p lu g sh a ll on ly b e in ser t ed in a sock et ou t let
p r ovid ed w it h a p r ot ect ive ea r t h con t a ct. An y in t er r u p t ion of
t h e p r ot ect ive con d u ct or in sid e or ou t sid e of t h e p r od u ct is
lik ely t o m a k e t h e p r od u ct d a n ger ou s. In t en t ion a l in t er r u p t ion
is p r oh ib it ed .
!
Chapter 1
17
General Information
Manufacturer's Declaration
WARNING
Alw a ys u se t h e t h r ee-p r on g a c p ow er cor d su p p lied w ith th is
p r od u ct . F a ilu r e t o en su r e a d eq u a t e ea r t h gr ou n d in g b y n ot
u sin g t h is cor d m a y ca u se p er son a l in ju r y a n d /or p r od u ct
d a m a ge.
Th is p r od u ct is d esign ed for u se in In st a lla t ion Ca t egor y II a n d
P ollu t ion Degr ee 3 p er IEC 61010 a n d IE C 60664 r esp ect ively.
Th is p r od u ct h a s a u t or a n gin g lin e volt a ge in p u t , b e su r e t h e
su p p ly volt a ge is w it h in t h e sp ecified r a n ge.
To p r even t elect r ica l sh ock , d iscon n ect in st r u m en t fr om m a in s
(lin e) b efor e clea n in g. Use a d r y clot h or on e sligh t ly d a m p en ed
w it h w a t er t o clea n t h e exter n a l ca se p a r t s. Do n ot a ttem p t t o
clea n in ter n a lly.
Ven t ila t ion R eq u ir em en t s: Wh en in st a llin g t h e p r od u ct in a
ca b in et , t h e con vect ion in t o a n d ou t of t h e p r od u ct m u st n ot b e
r est r ict ed . Th e a m b ien t t em p er a t u r e (ou t sid e t h e ca b in et ) m u st
b e less t h a n t h e m a xim u m op er a t in g t em p er a t u r e of t h e
p r od u ct b y 4° C for ever y 100 w a t t s d issip a t ed in t h e ca b in et . If
t h e t ot a l p ow er d issip a t ed in t h e ca b in et is gr ea t er t h a n 800
w a t t s, t h en for ced con vect ion m u st b e u sed .
Liftin g a n d Ha n d lin g
When lifting and handling the Agilent 8935 CDMA Cellular/PCS Base
Station Test Set use ergonomically correct procedures. Lift and carry by
the strap on the side panel.
When moving the Test Set more than a few feet, be sure to replace the
front screen cover.
Con su m a bles
Two AA alkalyne batteries are supplied with the Test Set and must be
replaced periodically. When replacing batteries always dispose of old
batteries in a conscientious manner, following manufacturer ’s
instructions.
18
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Product Markings
P r od u ct Ma r k in gs
The CE mark shows that the product complies with all relevant
European legal Directives (if accompanied by a year, it signifies when
the design was proven).
The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards
Association.
Chapter 1
19
General Information
Certification
Cer tifica tion
Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published
specifications at the time of shipment from the factory. Agilent further
certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United
States National Institute of Standards and Technology, to the extent
allowed by the Institute’s calibration facility, and to the calibration
facilities of other International Standards Organization members.
.
20
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Certification
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Ac c o rd ing to ISO/ IEC Guid e 22 a nd CEN/ CENELEC EN45014
Ma nufa c ture r’s Na m e :
Ag ile nt Te c hnolog ie s UK Lim ite d
Ma nufa c ture r’s Ad d re ss:
Ele c tro nic Pro d uc ts So lutio ns G ro up - Q ue e nsfe rry
So uth Q ue e nsfe rry
We st Lo thia n, EH30 9TG
Sc o tla nd , Unite d King d o m
De c la re s tha t the p ro d uc t
Prod uc t Na m e :
C DMA Ba se Sta tio n Te st Se t
E6380A
Mod e l Num b e r:
This d e c la ra tio n c o ve rs a ll o p tio ns o f the a b o ve p ro d uc t a s
d e ta ile d in TC F A-5951-9852-02.
Prod uc t Op tions:
EMC:
C o nfo rm s with the p ro te c tio n re q uire m e nts o f Euro p e a n C o unc il Dire c tive 89/ 336/ EEC o n the
a p p ro xim a tio n o f the la ws o f the m e m b e r sta te s re la ting to e le c tro m a g ne tic c o m p a tib ility,
a g a inst EMC te st sp e c ific a tio ns EN 55011:1991 (G ro up 1, C la ss A) a nd EN 50082-1:1992.
As De ta ile d in:
Ele c tro m a g ne tic C o m p a tib ility (EMC )
Te c hnic a l C o nstruc tio n File (TC F) No . A-5951-9852-02.
Asse sse d b y:
DTI Ap p o inte d C o m p e te nt Bo d y
EMC Te st C e ntre ,
G EC -Ma rc o ni Avio nic s Ltd .,
Ma xwe ll Build ing ,
Do nib ristle Ind ustria l Pa rk,
Hille nd ,
Dunfe rm line
KY11 9LB
Sc o tla nd , Unite d King d o m
Te c hnic a l Re p o rt Num b e r:6893/ 2201/ C BR, d a te d 23 Se p te m b e r 1997
Sa fe ty:
The p ro d uc t c o nfo rm s to the fo llo wing sa fe ty sta nd a rd s:
IEC 61010-1(1990) +A1(1992) +A2(1995) / EN 61010-1:1993
IEC 60825-1(1993) / EN 60825-1:1994
C a na d a / C SA-C 22.2 No . 1010.1-93
The p ro d uc t he re with c o m p lie s with the re q uire m e nts o f the Lo w Vo lta g e Dire c tive 73/ 23/ EEC,
a nd c a rrie s the C E m a rk a c c o rd ing ly
South Que e nsfe rry, Sc otla nd .
1st No ve m b e r 2000
R.M. Eva ns / Ma nufa c turing
Eng ine e ring Ma na g e r
Fo r furthe r info rm a tio n, p le a se c o nta c t yo ur lo c a l Ag ile nt Te c hno lo g ie s sa le s o ffic e , a g e nt, o r d istrib uto r.
Chapter 1
21
General Information
Agilent Technologies Warranty Statement for Commercial Products
Agilen t Tech n ologies Wa r r a n ty Sta tem en t
for Com m er cia l P r od u cts
E6380A CDMA/Cellular PCS Base Station Test Set
Duration of
Warranty: 1 Year
1. Agilent warrants Agilent hardware, accessories and supplies against
defects in materials and workmanship for the period specified above.
If Agilent receives notice of such defects during the warranty period,
Agilent will, at its option, either repair or replace products which
prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or
like-new.
2. Agilent warrants that Agilent software will not fail to execute its
programming instructions, for the period specified above, due to
defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and
used. If Agilent receives notice of such defects during the warranty
period, Agilent will replace software media which does not execute
its programming instructions due to such defects.
3. Agilent does not warrant that the operation of Agilent products will
be uninterrupted or error free. If Agilent is unable, within a
reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as
warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase
price upon prompt return of the product.
4. Agilent products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to
new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use.
5. The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of
installation if installed by Agilent. If customer schedules or delays
Agilent installation more than 30 days after delivery, warranty
begins on the 31st day from delivery.
6. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or
inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing,
parts or supplies not supplied by Agilent, (c) unauthorized
modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published
environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site
preparation or maintenance.
22
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Agilent Technologies Warranty Statement for Commercial Products
7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE
WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER
WARRANTYOR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND Agilent SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
8. Agilent will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up
to the greater of $300,000 or the actual amount paid for the product
that is the subject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or
death, to the extent that all such damages are determined by a court
of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective
Agilent product.
9. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES
IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE CUSTOMER’S SOLE
AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE,
IN NO EVENT WILL Agilent OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE
FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR
OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR
OTHERWISE.
FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW
ZEALAND: THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS
STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND
ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS
APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
Chapter 1
23
General Information
Assistance
Assist a n ce
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance
agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products. For any
assistance, contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service
Office.
Ta ble 1-1
R egion a l Sa les a n d Ser vice Office s
United States of America:
Agilent Technologies
Test and Measurement Call
Center
P.O. Box 4026
Englewood, CO 80155-4026
Canada:
Agilent Technologies Canada
Inc.
5150 Spectrum Way
Mississauga, Ontario
L4W 5G1
Europe:
Agilent Technologies
European Marketing
Organization
P.O. Box 999
1180 AZ Amstelveen
The Netherlands
(tel) 1 800 452 4844
(tel) 1 877 894 4414
(tel) (3120) 547 9999
J apan:
Latin America:
Australia/New Zealand:
Agilent Technologies
Australia Pty Ltd.
347 Burwood Highway
Forest Hill, Victoria 3131
Agilent Technologies J apan
Ltd.
Measurement Assistance
Center
9-1 Takakura-Cho,
Hachioji-Shi,
Tokyo 192-8510, J apan
Agilent Technologies
Latin America Region
Headquarters
5200 Blue Lagoon Drive,
Suite #950
Miami, Florida 33126
U.S. A.
(tel) 1 800 629 485
(Australia)
(fax) (61 3) 9272 0749
(tel) 0 800 738 378
(New Zealand)
(tel) (81) 456-56-7832
(fax) (81) 426-56-7840
(tel) (305) 267 4245
(fax) (305) 267 4286
(fax) (64 4) 802 6881
Asia Pacific:
Agilent Technologies
24/F, Cityplaza One,
111 Kings Road,
Taikoo Shing, Hong Kong
(tel) (852) 3197 7777
(fax) (852) 2506 9233
24
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Power Cables
P ow er Ca bles
Power
Cables
Ta ble 1-2
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g Typ e
P lu g Descr ip t ion s
m a le/fem a le
Agilen t P a r t #
(ca b le & p lu g)
Ca b le Descr ip tion s
St r a igh t/St r a igh t
St r a igh t/90°
8120-1689
8120-1692
79 in ch es, m in t gr a y
79 in ch es, m in t gr a y
Earth Ground
Line
Neutral
Used in the following locations
Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Angola, Armenia, Austria, Azerbaijan, Azores
Bangladesh, Belgium, Benin, Bolivia, Boznia-Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Burkina Faso,
Burma, Burundi, Byelarus
Cameroon, Canary Islands, Central AfricanRepublic, Chad, Chile, Comoros, Congo,
Croatia, Czech Republic, Czechoslovakia
Denmark, Djibouti
East Germany, Egypt, Estonia, Ethiopia
Finland, France, French Guiana, French Indian Ocean Areas
Gabon, Gaza Strip, Georgia, Germany, Gozo, Greece
Hungary
Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Italy, Ivory Coast
J ordan
Kazakhstan, Korea, Kyrgystan
Latvia, Lebanon, Libya, Lithuania, Luxembourg
Macedonia, Madeira Islands, Malagasy Republic, Mali, Malta, Mauritania, Miquelon,
Moldova, Mongolia, Morocco, Mozambique
Nepal, Netherlands, Netherlands Antilles, Niger, Norway
Oman
Pakistan, Paraguay, Poland, Portugal
Chapter 1
25
General Information
Power Cables
Ta ble 1-2
P lu g Typ e
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g Descr ip t ion s
m a le/fem a le
Agilen t P a r t #
(ca b le & p lu g)
Ca b le Descr ip tion s
St r a igh t/St r a igh t
St r a igh t/90°
8120-1689
8120-1692
79 in ch es, m in t gr a y
79 in ch es, m in t gr a y
Earth Ground
Line
Neutral
Rep. South Africa, Romania, Russia, Rwanda
Saudi Arabia (220V), Senegal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Somalia, Spain, Spanish
Africa, Sri Lanka, St.Pierce Islands
Sweden, Syria
Tajikistan, Thailand, Togo, Tunisia, Turkey, Turkmenistan
USSR, Ukraine, Uzbekistan
Western Africa, Western Sahara
Yugoslavia
Zaire
Ta ble 1-3
P lu g Typ e
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g
Agilen t P a r t
Ca b le Descr ip t ion s
Descr ip tion s
m a le/fem a le
#
(ca b le & p lu g)
Straight/Straight
8120-0698
90 inches, black
Earth Ground
Line
Line
Used in the following locations
Peru
26
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Power Cables
Ta ble 1-4
P lu g Typ e
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g
Agilen t P a r t # Ca b le Descr ip tion s
(ca b le & p lu g)
Descr ip tion s
m a le/fem a le
Straight/Straight
Straight/90°
8120-2104
8120-2296
79 inches, gray
79 inches, gray
Line
Neutral
Earth Ground
Used in the following locations
Switzerland
Ta ble 1-5
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g
P lu g Typ e
Agilen t P a r t
#
(ca ble &
p lu g)
Ca b le Descr ip tion s
Descr ip t ion s
m a le/fem a le
Straight/Straight
Straight/90
Straight/Straight
8120-1378
8120-1521
8120-1751
90 inches, jade gray
90 inches, jade gray
90 inches, jade gray
125V
Earth Ground
Neutral
Line
Used in the following locations
American Samoa
Bahamas, Barbados, Belize, Bermuda, Brazil,
Caicos, Cambodia, Canada, Cayman Islands, Columbia, Costa Rica, Cuba
Dominican Republic
Ecuador, El Salvador
French West Indies
Guam, Guatemala, Guyana
Haiti, Honduras
J amaica
Korea
Laos, Leeward and Windward Is., Liberia
Mexico, Midway Islands
Chapter 1
27
General Information
Power Cables
Ta ble 1-5
P lu g Typ e
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g
Agilen t P a r t
#
(ca ble &
p lu g)
Ca b le Descr ip tion s
Descr ip t ion s
m a le/fem a le
Nicaragua
Other Pacific Islands
Panama, Philippines, Puerto Rico
Saudi Arabia (115V,127V), Suriname
Taiwan, Tobago, Trinidad, Trust Territories of Pacific Islands
Turks Island
United States
Venezuela, Vietnam, Virgin Islands of the US
Wake Island
Ta ble 1-6
P lu g Typ e
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g
Agilen t P a r t #
(ca b le & p lu g)
Ca b le
Descr ip tion s
Descr ip tion s
m a le/fem a le
Straight/Straight
Straight/90°
8120-4753
8120-4754
90 inches, dark gray
90 inches, dark gray
J IS C 8303, 100 V
Earth Ground
Neutral
Line
Used in the following locations
J apan
Ta ble 1-7
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g
P lu g Typ e
Agilen t P a r t #
(ca b le & p lu g)
Ca b le
Descr ip tion s
Descr ip t ion s
m a le/fem a le
90° /STRAIGHT
8120-2956
8120-2957
8120-3997
79 inches, gray
79 inches, gray
79 inches, gray
90°/90°
Straight/Straight
Earth Groun
Neutral
Line
28
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Power Cables
Ta ble 1-7
P lu g Typ e
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g
Agilen t P a r t #
(ca b le & p lu g)
Ca b le
Descr ip tion s
Descr ip t ion s
m a le/fem a le
Used in the following locations
Denmark
Greenland
Ta ble 1-8
P lu g Typ e
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g Descr ip t ion s Agilen t P a r t #
m a le/fem a le (ca b le & p lu g)
Ca b le Descr ip tion s
Straight/Straight
Straight/90°
8120-4211
8120-4600
79 inches, mint gray
79 inches, mint gray
Earth Ground
Line
Neutral
Used in the following locations
Botswana
India
Lesotho
Malawi
South-West Africa (Namibia), Swaziland
Zambia, Zimbabwe
Ta ble 1-9
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g Typ e (Ma le)
P lu g
Descr ip tion s
m a le/fem a le
Agilen t P a r t #
(ca b le & p lu g)
Ca b le Descr ip tion s
90°/Straight
8120-1351
8120-1703
90 inches, mint gray
90 inches, mint gray
Earth Ground
90°/90°
Line
Neutral
Used in the following locations
Bahrain, British Indian Ocean Terr., Brunei
Canton, Cyprus
Chapter 1
29
General Information
Power Cables
Ta ble 1-9
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g Typ e (Ma le)
P lu g
Descr ip tion s
m a le/fem a le
Agilen t P a r t #
(ca b le & p lu g)
Ca b le Descr ip tion s
Enderbury Island, Equatorial Guinea
Falkland Islands, French Pacific Islands
Gambia, Ghana, Gibraltar, Guinea
Hong Kong
Ireland
Kenya, Kuwait
Macao, Malaysia, Mauritius
Nigeria
Qatar
Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Southern Asia, Southern Pacific Islands, St. Helena,
Sudan
Tanzania
Uganda, United Arab Emirates, United Kingdom
Yeman (Aden & Sana)
Ta ble 1-10
P lu g Typ e
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g
Agilen t P a r t #
(ca b le & p lu g)
Ca b le
Descr ip tion s
Descr ip t ion s
m a le/fem a le
Straight/Straight
Straight/90°
8120-1369
8120-0696
79 inches, gray
80 inches, gray
Earth Ground
Neutral
Line
Used in the following locations
Argentina, Australia
China (People’s Republic)
New Zealand
Papua New Guinea
Uruguay
30
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Power Cables
Ta ble 1-10
P lu g Typ e
P ow er Ca bles
P lu g
Agilen t P a r t #
(ca b le & p lu g)
Ca b le
Descr ip tion s
Descr ip t ion s
m a le/fem a le
Western Samoa
Ta ble 1-11 P ow er Ca bles
P lu g Typ e
P lu g
Agilen t P a r t #
(ca b le & p lu g)
Ca b le Descr ip t ion s
Descr ip tion s
m a le/fem a le
Straight/Straight
Straight/Straight
Straight/90°
8120-1860
8120-1575
8120-2191
8120-4379
60 inches, jade gray
30 inches, jade gray
60 inches, jade gray
15.5 inches, jade gray
Earth Ground
Line
Neutral
Straight/90°
Used in the following locations
System Cabinets
Chapter 1
31
General Information
Power Cables
ATTENTION
Static Sensitive
Devices
This instrument was constructed in an ESD (electro-static discharge) protected
environment. This is because most of the semiconductor devices used in this
instrument are susceptible to damage by static discharge.
Depending on the magnitude of the charge, device substrates can be punctured
or destroyed by contact or mere proximity of a static charge. The result can
cause degradation of device performance, early failure, or immediate
destruction.
These charges are generated in numerous ways such as simple contact,
separation of materials, and normal motions of persons working with static
sensitive devices.
When handling or servicing equipment containing static sensitive devices,
adequate precautions must be taken to prevent device damage or destruction.
Only those who are thoroughly familiar with industry accepted techniques for
handling static sensitive devices should attempt to service circuitry with these
devices.
32
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Product Description
P r od u ct Descr ip tion
The Agilent Technologies 8935 Series E6380A CDMA Cellular/PCS
Base Station Test Set offers full signal generation and analysis
capability and support for cellular frequency bands and international
PCS frequency bands.
You can perform the following CDMA measurements using the Test Set:
•
Signal Quality Measurements
— Rho (ρ)
— Time Offset
— Frequency Error
— Carrier Feedthrough
Code Domain Measurements (IS-95)
— Code Domain Power
•
•
— Code Domain Timing
— Code Domain Phase
Code Domain Measurements (IS-2000)
— Code Domain Power
— Code Domain Fast Power
— Code Domain Complex Power
— Code Domain Power & Noise
— Code Domain Fast Power Synchronization
Average Power
•
•
•
Channel Power
Error Vector Magnitude
The Test Set’s CDMA generator also has the following capabilities:
•
•
Reverse Channel Source with Data Buffer
AWGN (built-in calibrated E /N levels)
b
o
The Test Set also supports CDMA reference clocks and triggers.
Chapter 1
33
General Information
Product Description
In addition to its CDMA measurements and capabilities, the Test Set
also provides the following analog measurements:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AC Level
AM Depth
AF Frequency
DC Level
Distortion
Frequency and Frequency Error
Transmitter Power
FM Deviation
Audio Frequency
SINAD
SNR
34
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Documentation
Docu m en ta tion
Con ven tion s Used in Th is Ma n u a l
The following conventions are used throughout this manual to help
clarify instructions and reduce unnecessary text:
•
“Test Set” refers to the Agilent 8935 CDMA Cellular/PCS Base
Station Test Set.
•
•
Test Set keys are indicated like this: Preset
Test Set screen information, such as a measurement result or an
error message, is shown like this: TX Channel Power -1.3 dBm
NOTE
HP-IB and GPIB are one and the same.
Wh a t is in Th is Ma n u a l
•
front panel controls. It introduces the different types of control fields
that are used to make measurements
•
information about how to change measurement screens and change
control field settings. This chapter also provides some utility
procedures: calibrating channel power, setting a reference, setting
measurement limits, setting a generator/analyzer offset, averaging
measurements, saving and recalling setups, and using USER keys.
•
introduces the RFTOOLS program. This program automates some
measurements: cable fault location, swept return loss, swept and
discrete insertion loss, spectrum analyzer self-calibration. The
program also includes utilities for printing and data collection.
Basic operation of the built-in signal strength meter, spectrum
analyzer, oscilloscope, and code domain analyzer is also included in
this chapter.
•
screens and the fields that control the measurement’s parameters.
CDMA measurements include average power measurements,
channel power measurements, rho measurements (including
frequency error, time offset, and carrier feedthrough), EVM
measurements (including phase error and magnitude error), and
code domain measurements (both IS-95 and IS-2000 standards).
Chapter 1
35
General Information
Documentation
•
screens and the fields that control the measurement’s parameters.
Analog measurements include ac/dc level, AM depth, AF frequency,
distortion, frequency and frequency error, transmitter power, FM
deviation, SINAD, and SNR.
•
•
•
physical attributes of each connector on the Test Set.
any available upgrades, accessories, training and support for the
Test Set.
•
information about error recovery when messages are displayed.
Wh ich Docu m en t is Requ ir ed ?
The following documents are part of the Agilent 8935 document set.
Use the table to help you decide which document you need.
Ta ble 1-12
Docu m en t
Docu m en t Na viga t ion
P a r t Nu m ber
Usa ge
CDMA Application
Guide
E6380-90016
Use this manual for basic CDMA
measurements and for getting started with
the Test Set.
AMPS Application
Guide
E6380-90017
E6380-90019
Use this manual for making AMPS base
station measurements.
Reference Guide
Use this manual for screen and field
descriptions and general operation
information about the Test Set.
GPIB Syntax
Reference Guide
E6380-90073
E6380-90018
E6380-90015
5966-0512E
Use this manual as a reference to the syntax
and use of all available GPIB commands.
Programmer ’s Guide
Use this manual to learn GPIB syntax and for
learning how to program the Test Set.
Assembly Level Repair
Guide (this manual)
Use this manual to perform calibration on the
Test Set and for general service information.
Technical
Test Set’s specifications data sheet
Specifications
Publication
CDROM
E6380-90027
Includes all of the above documents.
36
Chapter1
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Preface.fm
General Information
Trademark Acknowledgments
Tr a d em a r k Ack n ow led gm en ts
Hewlett-Packard and HP are registered trademarks of
Hewlett-Packard Company.
Microsoft‚ Windows , and MS-DOS ‚ are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
ProComm‚ is a registered trademark of DataStorm Technologies, Inc.
HyperTerminal is a registered trademark of Hilgraeve, Incorporated.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
Chapter 1
37
Getting Started
•
•
•
•
40
Chapter 2
Getting Started
Before Connecting a Radio
Befor e Con n ect in g a R a d io
NOTE
The RF IN/OUT port should be used for all transmitter tests when the radio is connected
directly to the Test Set. (All UUT transmitter power measurements are made through
this port). Off-the-air measurements can be made using the ANT IN port.
CAUTION
Overpower Damage— Refer to the Test Set’s side panel for maximum input power level
at the RF IN/OUT, DUPLEX OUT, and ANT IN connectors. Exceeding these levels can
cause permanent instrument damage.
41
Chapter 2
Getting Started
Changing the Test Set’s Display
Ch a n gin g t h e Test Set ’s Disp la y
Ch a n gin g th e Mea su r em en t Scr een
The measurement screen is changed using the titlebar at the top of the screen and the
cursor-control knob, using the GENERATOR/ANALYZER keys, or by using the UTILS
keys. Rotate the knob to move the cursor from field to field or to change settings. Press
information about fields).
F igu r e 2-1
Usin g t h e cu r sor -con tr ol Kn ob or Scr een Keys
Press one of the
Push the knob to make a
selection. Rotate the
knob to move the cursor,
or change the settings.
GENERATOR/ANALYZER
or UTILS keys for a shortcut
to the measurement or
configuration screens.
Titlebar
42
Chapter 2
Getting Started
Changing the Test Set’s Display
To ch a n ge t h e m ea su r em en t scr een
St ep 1. Select the titlebar at the top of the screen (placement of the titlebar may vary slightly on
some screens).
St ep 2. Select the measurement screen from the list of choices.
OR
St ep 1. Press a screen key: CDMA Gen, CDMA Anl, Code Dom, RF Gen, RF Anl, Spec Anl, AF
Anl, Scope, Prev, Inst Config, Help, Printer Config, I/O Config, Error Message.
AF Anl, Scope, Printer Config, I/O Config, and Error Message are shifted functions
(labeled in blue above a key). You must press and release the blue Shift key then the key
below the blue label to access the screen (or other function) labeled in blue.
Pressing the Prev key displays the previous screen.
43
Chapter 2
Getting Started
Changing the Test Set’s Display
Ch a n gin g th e Con tr ol F ield s
There are several types of control fields in the Test Set. This section describes some of
the different types of fields.
Un it -of-Mea su r e F ield
Unit-of-measure can be changed to display measurements in different values or
magnitudes. The unit-of-measure field can also be used to turn a measurement on or off
(use the On/Off Yes key).
F igu r e 2-2
Un it -of-Mea su r e F ield
Unit-of-Measure
To ch a n ge a u n it-of-m ea su r e field
St ep 1. Position the cursor at the unit field on the display.
St ep 2. Press a key labeled with a different unit-of-measure
(such as W).
If the new units are valid, the measurement value is displayed in the unit.
If the new units are not valid, the message Invalid keystroke.is displayed and the
units are not changed.
44
Chapter 2
Getting Started
Changing the Test Set’s Display
Un d er lin ed E n tr y F ield
Underlined entry fields provide a choice of two settings (toggle).
F igu r e 2-3
Un d er lin ed E n tr y F ield
Underlined
Entry Field
To Ch a n ge a n u n d er lin ed en t r y
St ep 1. Position the cursor at the field.
St ep 2. Push the cursor-control knob or the Enter key to move the underline under the desired
choice.
The underlined setting is immediately activated when selected.
45
Chapter 2
Getting Started
Changing the Test Set’s Display
On e-of-Ma n y F ield
One-of-many fields display a list of choices when selected.
F igu r e 2-4
On e-of-Ma n y F ield
One-of-Many
Field
To m a k e a on e-of-m a n y ch oice
St ep 1. Position the cursor at the field.
St ep 2. Push the cursor-control knob or the Enter key to display the choices.
St ep 3. Move the cursor through the choices by turning the knob.
St ep 4. Push the cursor-control knob or the Enter key to make the choice.
The choice is immediately activated when selected.
46
Chapter 2
Getting Started
Changing the Test Set’s Display
Nu m er ic-E n tr y F ield s
Values for numeric entry fields can be entered and changed using various methods,
depending on your testing needs.
F igu r e 2-5
Nu m er ic-E n tr y F ield
Numeric Entry Field
To ch a n ge a va lu e
St ep 1. Position the cursor at the field.
St ep 2. Key in the desired number using the DATA ENTRY keys.
St ep 3. Press Enter to select the choice.
OR
St ep 4. Position the cursor at the field.
St ep 5. Push the cursor-control knob (the flashing >> cursor appears).
St ep 6. Turn the knob to increment or decrement the value. (The current increment value may
St ep 7. Push the cursor-control knob or the Enter key to select the choice.
OR
St ep 8. Position the cursor at the field.
St ep 9. Use the up-arrow or down-arrow keys to increment or decrement the value.
47
Chapter 2
Getting Started
Changing the Test Set’s Display
Decim a l Va lu es
Decimal values are used for most numeric entry fields. The acceptable entries for
decimal values are 0 through 9,. , +/-, and EEX.
The +/- key is used for entering negative numbers.
The EEX key is used to enter values in exponential notation. For example to enter 10-9
you would enter 1, 0, EEX (Shift, +/-), +/-, 9.
Hexa d ecim a l Va lu es
Hexadecimal (Hex) values are used for entering some signaling parameters. The
acceptable entries values are 0 through 9 and A through F. No unit-of-measure is
associated with these values.
Hexadecimal values are either entered from the keypad (A through F are shifted
functions) or for some fields, values are selected from a list of choices.
48
Chapter 2
Getting Started
How do I Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly?
How d o I Ver ify t h a t t h e Test Set is Op er a tin g P r op er ly?
If your Test Set powers-up and displays the CDMA ANALYZER screen, but you suspect
an instrument problem, use the Instrument Quick Check to verify operation of the basic
instrument functions.
If no failure is indicated by this test, but you still suspect a problem, refer to the
“Performance Tests” information in the Assembly Level Repair Manual.
In str u m en t Qu ick Ch eck
St ep 1. Set up the quick check:
a . Remove any connected cables (except for AC or DC power).
b . Turn instrument power on (if it is not already on).
c. Press Preset.
d . Press Inst Config and set the RF Displayfield to Freq.
e. Press CDMA Anl and select the Avg Pwrfield, then select Rhofrom the Choices: menu.
f. Set the Tune Freqfield to 800 MHz.
g. Set the Anl Dirfield to Fwd.
h . Press CDMA Gen and set the Output Portfield to RF Out.
i. Set the RF Gen Freqfield to 800 MHz.
j. Set the Amplitudefield to −40 dBm
k . Set the Gen Dir. field to Fwd. (The EQ In/Outfield is displayed.)
St ep 2. Check the following reading:
a . Rho should be greater than 0.96.
St ep 3. Press Spec Anl to access the SPEC ANL screen.
You should see the characteristic CDMA spectrum.
49
Chapter 2
Getting Started
How do I Verify that theTest Set is Operating Properly?
F igu r e 2-6
CDMA Sp ect r u m
50
Chapter 2
Operating Overview
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
52
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Displaying CDMA Measurements
Disp la yin g CDMA Mea su r em en ts
Ch a n n el P ow er, Ad ja cen t Ch a n n el P ow er (ACP ), R h o,
Er r or Vector Ma gn itu d e (EVM), Aver a ge P ow er
You can select channel power, ACP, rho, EVM, or average power on the
CDMA ANALYZER or CDMA GENERATOR screen as shown in
F igu r e 3-1
Disp la yin g Ch a n n el P ow er, ACP, R h o, E VM, or Aver a ge P ow er
ADC F u ll Sca le (ADC F S)
When you select Avg Pwror Chan Pwr, the ADC FSmeasurement is also
displayed.
Tim e Offset , F r eq u en cy Er r or, P N Offset , Ca r r ier F eed t h r ou gh
When you select Rho, the Time Offset, Freq Error PN Offset, (see
measurements are also displayed on the CODE DOM screen.
F igu r e 3-2
F r eq u en cy E r r or, a n d P N Offset
Chapter 3
53
Operating Overview
Displaying CDMA Measurements
Ma gn it u d e Er r or, P h a se E r r or
When you select EVM, the Magnitude Errorand Phase Error
measurements are displayed.
Cod e Dom a in Mea su r em en ts (P ow er, F a st P ow er,
P ow er & Noise, Com p lex P ow er, P h a se, Tim in g, F a st
P ow er Syn ch r on iza tion )
Code domain measurements are displayed on the CODE DOM screen.
To select a code domain measurement, first press the Inst Config button
and then select the standard for which you want to make a code domain
measurement: IS-95or IS-2000.
The measurements available in the code domain under IS-95 only, are:
•
•
•
•
Power
Fast Power
Timing
Phase
The measurements available in the code domain under IS-2000 are:
•
•
•
•
•
Power
Fast Power
Power & Noise
Complex Power
Fast Power Synchronization
Now go to the CODE DOM screen and select a measurement from the
measurement selection for IS-95.
54
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Displaying Analog Measurements
Disp la yin g An a log Mea su r em en ts
RF Mea su r em en ts
F r equ en cy E r r or, F r equ en cy
RF Frequency Error and RF Frequency are displayed on the RF
ANALYZER, RF GENERATOR, and AF ANALYZER screens.
F igu r e 3-5
Disp la yin g RF F r eq u en cy Er r or or R F F r equ ency, a n d TX
P ow er
Choices:
Freq Error
Frequency
TX
Power
Tr a n sm it t er (TX)P ow er
TX Poweris only measured and displayed here when the Input Port
on the RF ANALYZER screen is set to RF In. If Ant(antenna) is
selected, the measurement is replaced by four dashes (- - - -).
You can measure low power levels on the ANT IN port using the
spectrum analyzer.
CAUTION
Connecting a signal of >60 mW to the ANT IN (antenna) port can cause
instrument damage (although internal protection circuits can typically
withstand a short-duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts). If the overpower
circuit is triggered, remove power from the ANT IN port and turn the
Test Set off and on to reset it.
56
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Displaying Analog Measurements
Disp la yin g AF Mea su r em en ts
F M Devia t ion , AM Dep t h , AC Level
The AF Anl Insetting determines the AF analyzer’s input and the
measurement displayed in the top-right corner of the measurement
GENERATOR, RF ANALYZER, and AF ANALYZER screens.
F igu r e 3-6
Disp la yin g F M Devia t ion , AM Dep t h , or AC Level
Choices:
FM Demod
AM Demod
SSB Demod
Audio In
Ext Mod
FM Mod
AM Mod
Ta ble 3-1
Mea su r em en t
AF An l In Set tin g
FM Deviation
AM Depth
AC Level
FM Demod, FM Mod
AM Demod, AM Mod
SSB Demod, Audio In, Ext Mod, Audio Out
SINAD, Dist or t ion , SNR , AF F r equ en cy, DC Level,
These measurements are available on the RF GENERATOR,
58.
Chapter 3
57
Operating Overview
Displaying Analog Measurements
F igu r e 3-7
Disp la yin g SINAD, Dist or t ion , SNR , DC Level, or
AF F r eq u en cy
Choices:
SINAD
Distn
SNR
AF Freq
DC Level
The Distortion and SINAD measurements use the variable frequency
notch filter (audio analyzer screen frequency range 300 Hz – 10 kHz).
Selecting SNR (Signal/Noise Ratio) turns off any other audio
measurement. For more information on making this measurement, see
58
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Displaying Measurement Results on a Meter Scale
Disp la yin g Mea su r em en t Resu lts on a Meter
Sca le
F igu r e 3-8
Disp la yin g t h e Met er Sca le
Unit-of -Measure
Fields
Meters:
On/Off
Lo End
Hi End
Intervals
Measurement results can be displayed on a meter scale. The digital
numeric value is still displayed (but smaller) under the meter scale.
To d isp la y th e m eter sca le
1. Move the cursor to the unit-of-measure field for the measurement
you want displayed on the meter.
2. Press and release the blue Shift key, then the Incr Set key to access
the meter function.
3. Select On/Offfrom the Meters: menu (or press the On/Off key).
To set th e m eter ’s en d p oin ts a n d sca le in t er va ls
1. Use the knob to select the unit-of-measure field for the measurement
you want displayed on the meter.
2. Press and release the blue Shift key, then the Incr Set key to access
the meter function.
3. Select Hi End, Lo End, or Intervalfrom the Meters:menu and
enter the value for your selection, then press the Enter key.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set the desired parameters for
the meter ’s scale.
Chapter 3
59
Operating Overview
Using Channel Numbers to Set Analyzer and Generator Frequencies
Usin g Ch a n n el Nu m b er s t o Set An a lyzer a n d
Gen er a tor F r equ en cies
RF analyzer and RF generator frequencies can be entered by channel
number (the default setting) or by discrete frequencies (in MHz). The
RF Displayfield on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen controls
which way frequencies are entered. This screen is accessed by pressing
the Inst Config key.
If the RF Displayfield is set to Chanfor channel tuning, you also need
to set the RF Chan Stdfield to indicate the standard for your base
station (such as North American PCS). This automatically sets the
correct frequency offset needed to generate reverse channel signals and
analyze forward channel signals for base stations.
If you do not know the channel number of your base station, but know
the transmit and receive frequencies, set the RF Displayfield to Freq.
You can then enter these frequencies directly for the RF generator and
RF analyzer during tests.
F igu r e 3-9
Con figu r a t ion t o Use Ch a n n el Nu m ber s for RF Gen er a t or a n d
An a lyzer Set t in gs
Set the RF Disp la y field to Ch a n
to turn on channel tuning.
Select the RF Ch a n St d field to
display a list of system types.....
..and then select the channel standard
for testing your base stations.
60
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Calibrating the Channel Power Measurement – CDMA Analyzer
Ca libr a tin g t h e Ch a n n el P ow er Mea su r em en t
– CDMA An a lyzer
To calibrate a channel power measurement using the internal CDMA
generator:
Step 4. Remove power from the RF IN/OUT (or ANT IN) port.
Step 5. Go to the CDMA ANALYZER screen and choose the Chan Pwr
measurement.
Step 6. Set the Tune Freqfield (or RF Channelfield) to the center frequency of
your CDMA signal.
Step 7. Select the Chn Pwr Calfield and wait until the calibration is complete.
Chapter 3
61
Operating Overview
Calibrating the Channel Power Measurement – Code Domain
Ca libr a tin g t h e Ch a n n el P ow er Mea su r em en t
– Cod e Dom a in
To calibrate a channel power measurement using the internal CDMA
generator:
Step 8. Remove power from the RF IN/OUT (or ANT IN) port.
Step 9. Go to the CODE DOMAIN screen and choose the CD Setup(IS-95 only)
or Reference(IS-2000) control.
St ep 10. Select Absfrom the CD pwr unitfield.
St ep 11. Select the Chn Pwr Calfield and and press the knob to start
calibration. Wait until the calibration is complete.
62
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Calibrating the Adjacent Channel Power (ACP) Measurement
Ca libr a tin g t h e Ad ja cen t Ch a n n el P ow er
(ACP ) Mea su r em en t
To calibrate an ACP measurement using the internal CDMA generator:
St ep 12. Remove power from the RF IN/OUT (or ANT IN) port.
St ep 13. Go to the CDMA ANALYZER screen and choose the ACPmeasurement.
St ep 14. Set the Tune Freqfield (or RF Channelfield) to the center frequency of
your CDMA signal.
St ep 15. Select the ACP Calfield and wait until the calibration is complete.
Chapter 3
63
Operating Overview
Changing the Increment or Decrement Setting
Ch a n gin g th e In cr em en t or Decr em en t Settin g
Sp ecifyin g An In cr em en t Va lu e for th e Ar r ow Keys or
Kn ob
The Incr Set key is used to assign a specific increment value. The
increment value may use different units than the field you are
incrementing/decrementing. For instance; if the RF generator ’s
Amplitudesetting is displayed in dB µV, you could increment in units
of dB or mV.
To change the increment/decrement value
Step 1. Move the cursor to the numeric entry field to be changed.
Step 2. Press Incr Set, and enter the desired incremental value and
unit-of-measure using the DATA ENTRY keys.
Step 3. Use the down-arrow and up-arrow keys
or cursor control
knob to increment the field’s value. The field’s value changes by the
value you set for each key press or knob click.
Usin g th e F a ctor of 10 In cr em en t/Decr em en t Keys
The Incr× 10 and Incr ÷10 keys change the increment/decrement value
by a factor of 10.
For example, if you set the increment for Tune Freqto 10 MHz for
every click of the knob or push of the down-arrow or up-arrow keys,
pushing Incr × 10 changes the increment value to 100 MHz.
64
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Using Measurement Limit Indicators
Usin g Mea su r em en t Lim it In d ica tor s
The Lo Limit and Hi Limit functions are used to define a measurement
“window.” You can set a high limit, a low limit, or both. When limits are
assigned, Lo, Hior both are indicated on the screen.
A measurement that goes above or below the defined limits causes
three things to happen:
1. A message appears at the top of the screen indicating a limit was
exceeded.
2. The Loor Hiindicator flashes.
3. The beeper beeps (if it is has been enabled in the INSTRUMENT
CONFIGURE screen).
Limits are helpful when you can’t watch the Test Set’s display while you
are making an adjustment on the equipment you are testing or
repairing. They are also a convenient way of alerting you to long-term
measurement drift.
To set h igh a n d low lim its
Step 1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the measurement
for which you are setting limits.
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the down-arrow key to access the
Lo Limit function, and enter the measurement’s low-limit value and its
1
unit-of-measure.
Step 3. Press and release the Shift key, then the up-arrow key to access the Hi
Limit function, and enter the measurement’s high-limit value and its
1
unit-of-measure.
To r eset or r em ove lim its
To reset a limit that has been exceeded
Step 4. Position the cursor in front of the measurement’s unit-of-measure.
Step 5. Press and release the Shift key, then the down-arrow (or up-arrow key)
to access the Lo Limit (or Hi Limit) function.
Step 6. Press Enter or Shift then Hold to access the Meas Reset function.
1. The fundamental unit for the limits does not have to be the same as the measurement’s units. For
instance; when measuring AC Level in Volts, you can set high and low limits in units of dBm.
Chapter 3
65
Operating Overview
Using Measurement Limit Indicators
To r em ove a lim it
Step 1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the assigned
limit.
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the down-arrow (or up-arrow key)
to access the Lo Limit (or Hi Limit) function, then press the On/Off key.
66
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Setting A Measurement Reference
Settin g A Mea su r em en t Refer en ce
The reference set (Ref Set) function establishes a measurement
reference point. This allows you to make a direct comparison between
two measurement results, or between a measurement standard and the
actual measurement results.
Depending on the type of measurement, referenced measurements are
displayed in one of two ways:
1. Displayed value = Measurement − Reference. The difference between
the measured value and the reference value is displayed.
or
2. Displayed value = Measurement ÷ Reference. A ratio of the measured
value to the reference value is displayed. This ratio is expressed in
dB.
To set a r efer en ce
Step 1. Position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure for the measurement
you want to set the reference for.
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the Incr ÷ 10 key to access the Ref
Set function.
Step 3. Enter a reference value, then press Enter. (To use the currently
measured value as a reference, just press Enter.)
Step 4. The Reference indicator shows that an internal reference has been set.
Step 5. To turn the reference off press and release the Shift key, then the Incr ÷
10 key to access the Ref Set function, and then press the On/Off key.
Chapter 3
67
Operating Overview
Averaging Measurements
Aver a gin g Mea su r em en ts
The Avg (average) function allows you to display the average value of a
number of measurements. You enter the number of measurement
samples used to calculate and display the measurement average. This
dampens the effects of rapidly changing measurements, providing a
more usable measurement display.
To u se m ea su r em en t a ver a gin g
Step 1. Position the cursor in front of the measurement’s unit-of-measure.
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the Incr × 10 key to access the Avg
function.
Step 3. Enter the desired number of measurement samples to be used for
calculating the average, then press the knob or the Enter key.
or
Press On/Off to use the currently-displayed number of samples.
Step 4. To turn averaging off, position the cursor in front of the unit-of-measure
and press and release the Shift key, then the Incr × 10 key to access the
Avg function, then press the On/Off key.
How th e Test Set Aver a ges Mea su r em en ts
When the averaging function is first enabled, a numeric average is
calculated and displayed each time a measurement is made. This
continues until the specified number of samples is reached. From that
point on, the averaging function performs an exponential filtering
operation that mimics an RC filter.
Because of the exponential response, any large measurement changes
result in a displayed value that ramps up or down to the actual
measured value.
A measurement reset clears the measurement history for all
measurements and starts the averaging process over. (Press and
release the Shift key then the Hold key (Meas Reset) to reset the
measurement.)
68
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Setting an RF Generator/Analyzer Offset
Settin g a n RF Gen er a tor /An a lyzer Offset
You can set a fixed frequency offset between the RF generator and the
RF analyzer. This feature is convenient for testing radios with a fixed
transmit/receive frequency offset.
To set a n RF Offset
Step 1. Go to the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.
Step 2. Set the RF Displayfield to Freq.
Step 3. Set the RF Offsetfield to On.
Step 4. Select the (Gen)-(Anl)field and enter the frequency offset value.
Step 5. Go to the RF GENERATOR screen.
Step 6. Select the RF Gen Freqfield, and rotate the cursor control knob to vary
the RF generator’s frequency.
Step 7. Go to the RF ANALYZER screen. Notice that the Tune Freqvalue
changes to maintain the offset between the generator and the analyzer.
(You can use the Prev key to switch between the generator and analyzer
screens.)
Chapter 3
69
Operating Overview
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups
Sa vin g a n d Reca llin g In str u m en t Setu p s
The save and recall functions allow you to store different instrument
setups and retrieve them later, eliminating the task of re-configuring
the Test Set.
The number of available save registers depends on how many changes
the number of save registers that can be used (typically over 200).
Save/Recall register settings can be saved to internal RAM or to a PC
card. Saving registers to a PC card allows you to “back up” the settings
in case you need to clear them from memory for running large
To sa ve a n in str u m en t setu p
Step 1. Go to the I/O CONFIGURE screen.
Step 2. Select the storage media using the Save/Recallfield. (The default is
internal memory.)
Step 3. Make any changes to the instrument that you want to save in a register.
Step 4. Press and release the Shift key then the Recall key to access the Save
function.
Step 5. Use the DATA ENTRY keys or the Save:menu to enter the register’s
name.
To r eca ll a n in str u m en t setu p
Step 1. Select the I/O CONFIGURE screen.
Step 2. Select the media to recall settings from using the Save/Recallfield.
The default is internal memory.
Step 3. Press Recall.
Step 4. Use the knob to select the desired setup to be recalled from the Recall
menu.
70
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups
To r em ove (clea r ) a n in d ivid u a l sa ve r egist er
Step 1. Specify where the register is stored using the Save/Recallfield on the
I/O CONFIGURE screen.
Step 2. Press Recall.
Step 3. Use the knob to position the cursor in front of the register to be removed
from the Recallmenu at the bottom-right of the screen. The register
name and percentage of memory occupied by that register are indicated
at the top of the screen.
Step 4. Press Yes On/Off. A prompt appears, asking if you want to delete the
save register.
Step 5. Press Yes On/Off.
To clea r a ll sa ve r egister s
Step 1. Press Recall.
Step 2. Use the knob to position the cursor in front of the *Clr All*entry in
the Recallmenu at the bottom-right of the screen.
Step 3. Press the knob or press Enter. A prompt appears at the top of the screen
to verify that you want to clear all registers.
Step 4. Press Yes On/Off.
Register Na m es
You can use any number, letter, or combination of numbers and letters
as a name for storing instrument settings. For instance; if you want to
save a setup for testing a “Vulcan7” radio, you can save the setting as
“VULCAN7”.
Two register names are reserved for special purposes: POWERON and
BASE.
P OWE R ON Set t in gs
When the Test Set is turned on, it uses a set of instrument setup
parameters specified at the time of manufacture. You can have the
instrument power up in a different state by making the desired changes
to the original settings, and then saving them using the name
POWERON.
The next time the instrument is turned on, the instrument returns to
the state present when you saved the POWERON setting. For instance;
if the SCOPE screen was displayed when POWERON was saved, it is
the screen that is displayed when you turn the instrument on.
Chapter 3
71
Operating Overview
Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups
BASE Set t in gs
The BASE register contains any field settings the user has saved that
are different from the instrument preset state. It establishes a
reference point for all future saves. If a base is not saved, the preset
state is used as the reference.
When you save an instrument setup, the new setup is compared to the
base settings, and any differences are stored under the register name
you supply. Because only differences are stored, a much larger number
of instrument setups can be saved than if the contents of every field was
saved.
When you recall an instrument setting, every field is reset to the base
settings. The saved settings are then used to re-establish the desired
instrument setup.
You can define your own base setting. If your desired settings are very
different from the preset values, you may want to change the BASE
register. This will decrease the amount of memory used to save each
setup, and allow you to save many more setups.
CAUTION
Since each save/recall register only contains the differences between
the setup being saved and the present base register settings, changing
the base settings causes all other saved setups to be erased from
memory (including the POWERON setting if one has been saved).
Unless you consistently change the same fields to the same value each
time you use the instrument, you should avoid creating your own BASE
settings.
Mem or y Con sid er a tion s
When the Save/Recallfield of the I/O CONFIGURE screen is set to
Internal, programs are saved to the same non-volatile RAM used to
create RAM disk(s) and run IBASIC programs. By saving a large
number of instrument setups, you reduce the amount of RAM available
to run programs. If you get a “memory overflow” message while trying
to load a program, you must clear one or more save/recall registers to
free RAM space.
In str u m en t Ha r d w a r e Ch a n ges
Recalling a saved register that uses a hardware option that has been
removed results in unspecified operation. Re-install the needed option
before attempting to recall the associated register(s).
72
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Using USER Keys
Usin g USER Keys
You can use user keys to move quickly between fields on the same
screen, and to access fields that are not normally available on the
screen you are using.
Local user keys are used to move between settings on the screen that is
displayed. Five local user keys are available for each screen: k1, k2, k3,
k4, and k5. When the user key is pressed, the cursor instantly moves to,
and selects, the assigned field; eliminating the need to turn and push
the knob. Using these keys removes any other local user keys you may
have set up.
Global user keys are used to access settings that are not available on
the current screen. Three global user keys are available: k1', k2', and k3'.
(Use the Shift key to access the global user keys)
Usin g P r e-Defin ed USER Keys
Step 1. Press and release the Shift key, the k4 key; then the Enter key. The
Step 2. Press the USER keys (k1 to k5) and notice how the cursor immediately
moves to the corresponding field.
Step 3. To stop using the default user keys, press and release the Shift key, then
the k5 key to access the Release function; then press the Enter key.
F igu r e 3-10
An E xa m p le of P r e-Assign ed Loca l User Keys
USER
k1’
k1
k2’
k2
k3’
k3
Assign
k4
Release
k5
Chapter 3
73
Operating Overview
Using USER Keys
Assign in g a n d R elea sin g USER Keys
When defining user keys, the Assign function is used to create key
definitions; the Release function removes the definitions. Re-assigning a
user key to a different field automatically releases it from its previous
setting.
To a ssign loca l u ser k eys
Step 1. Move the cursor to the field that you want to assign to a local user key.
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the k4 key to access the Assign
function. Then press a USER key (k1-k5). The user key number appears
in front of the field you assigned it to. (Since the cursor is at the newly
assigned field, the USER key number is hidden until the cursor is
moved.)
To r elea se loca l u ser k eys
Step 1. Display the screen containing the user key assignment to be removed.
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the k5 key to access the Release
function; then press the USER key (k1-k5).
To a ssign glob a l u ser k eys
Step 1. Move the cursor to the field you want to assign a global USER key to.
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the k4 key to access the Assign
function. Then press Shift and a USER key (k1'- k3'). Unlike a local user
key, the user key number does not appear at this field; instead, a
prompt appears at the top of the screen confirming the key assignment.
To r elea se glob a l u ser k eys
Step 1. Move the cursor to the field with the global user key assigned to it.
Step 2. Press and release the Shift key, then the k5 key to access the Release
function. Then press Shift and the user key to be released.
74
Chapter3
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Opoverv.fm
Operating Overview
Replacing Batteries
Rep la cin g Ba t ter ies
Test Set backs up its RAM using two battery types.
One type is a set of two AA batteries mounted inside the rear panel of
the Test Set. You must periodically change these batteries.
The second type of RAM backup battery is not user serviceable.
CAUTION
NOTE
Failure to take prompt action may result in loss of RAM data including
IBASIC programs and SAVE / RECALL states stored in the RAM.
Do not use rechargeable batteries.
To change the AA batteries, use the following procedure:
1. Turn off power and unplug the Test Set.
2. Remove the six screws in the rear panel using a TX-15 TORX (R)
screwdriver.
3. Remove the rear panel.
4. Replace the AA batteries as indicated in the battery holder.
5. Replace the rear panel. Dispose of used batteries properly.
Chapter 3
75
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
78
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
Loa d in g a n d R u n n in g RF Tools
1. Press the MENU key to display the SOFTWARE MENU screen
(shown below).
F igu r e 4-1
SOFTWARE ME NU Scr een
Choices:
Card
ROM
RAM
Choices:
RFTOOLS
2. Position the cursor at the highlighted area under Select Procedure
Location and push the knob to select it. A Choicesmenu appears.
3. Position the cursor at ROMand select it.
4. Position the cursor at the highlighted area under Select Procedure
Filename and select it. A Choices menu appears.
5. Position the cursor at RFTOOLS and select it.
6. Press k1 (Run Test). The software is now loading. Wait for the RF
7. Select an item from the menu.
F igu r e 4-2
RF Tools Ma in Men u Scr een
80
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
Test R esu lts/BTS Utility Setu p
Use this setup to configure a method for measurement data collection.
Measurement results may be collected using a printer, a laptop, or a PC
card.
F igu r e 4-3
Test R esu lt s/BTS Ut ilit y Set u p Scr een s
Test Results/BTS Utility Setup Screen
(BTS Laptop Utility Off)
RF Tools Main Menu
Test Results/BTS Utility Setup Screen
(BTS Laptop Utility On)
Chapter 4
81
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
To u se a la p t op a n d t h e BTS La p t op Ut ilit y for d a t a collect ion :
This function of RF Tools is used with the BTS Laptop Utility program.
Test results can be stored as ASCII or plot data. For more information
on this utility, refer to the on-line help accompanying the BTS Laptop
Utility software.
1. Position the cursor at Use BTS Laptop Utility and select it (see
appropriate options.
2. Position the cursor at Serial Port Settings 9 and select it. The
serial port settings appear. Serial baud, parity, data length, stop
length, and flow control can be edited.
3. Confirm that these serial port settings match the BTS Laptop Utility
settings on the laptop.
4. Press k5 (Return) to return to the Test Results/BTS
Utility/Printer/Serial Setup.
5. Press k5 (Return) to exit the setup.
To u se a p r in t er for d a t a collect ion :
1. If Use BTS Laptop Utilityis set to Yes, change it to Noby
selecting the field.
2. Position the cursor at Send Test Results to Printer atand
select it. A Choicesmenu appears.
3. Position the cursor at the correct port and select it.
4. Position the cursor at Print Setupand select it. Lines per page and
form feed locations can be edited.
5. Press k5 (Return) to go back to the previous menu.
82
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
To u se a la p t op in t er fa ce ot h er t h a n t h e BTS La p t op Ut ilit y
1. If Use BTS Laptop Utilityis set to Yes, change it to Noby
selecting the field.
2. Position the cursor at Send Test Results toand select it. A
Choicesmenu appears.
3. Position the cursor at Serial 9and select it.
4. Position the cursor at Serial Port Settings 9and select it. A list
of serial port settings appears.
5. Confirm that these serial port settings and the settings on the laptop
match.
6. Press k5 (Return) to return to the Test Results/BTS
Utility/Printer/Serial Setup.
7. Press k5 (Return) to exit the setup.
Sw ep t Ga in
Mea su r em en t Descr ip t ion
This test measures the gain of a device by sweeping it over the specified
frequency range. Gain is the ratio of the output power to the input
power. For the swept gain test, gain is measured in dB. The gain is the
output power in dBm minus the input power in dBm. For example, if
the amplifier has an output of 22 dBm and an input of 4 dBm, it has a
gain of 18 dB.
Ma k in g t h e Mea su r em en t
NOTE
This test radiates a test signal when testing antennas or cables with
antennas attached to them. Verify that the level and frequency span
used for the test cannot result in interference to other nearby antennas.
To minimize interference when running the program, set the power
level at the DUPLEX OUT port to the minimum value needed for good
measurement resolution. Set the frequency range carefully.
1. Select Swept Gainfrom the Select Test (Main) Menu. The Swept
Gain Measurement menu will appear.
Chapter 4
83
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
F igu r e 4-4
Select in g t h e Sw ep t Ga in Mea su r em en t Test
2. Position the cursor at Start Frequency in MHz and select it. Enter
a value for the start of the frequency sweep from 0.4 MHz to
1000 MHz or 1700 MHz to 2000 MHz.
3. Position the cursor at Stop frequency in MHZ and select it. Enter
a value from 0.4 MHz to 1000 MHz or 1700 MHz to 2000 MHz. This
value should be larger than the start frequency and in the same
frequency band.
4. Position the cursor at Plot scale in dB/divand select it. A
Choicesmenu appears. The available choices are 1, 5 or 10.
5. Position the cursor at Maximum Expected Gain in dBand select it.
Enter a value in the range of − 50 to +40 dB. This parameter sets the
expected worst case power for the ANT IN port. It is very important
to overestimate the expected gain to avoid damage to the ANT IN
port. This parameter also determines plot resolution by setting the
upper limit.
84
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
6. Position the cursor at DUPLEX OUT Level in dBmand select it.
Enter the power level, − 54 to +10 dBm, at which the test should be
conducted. If you are testing a power sensitive device, enter a low
level value to avoid damage to that device.
CAUTION
Damage may result if the power input to the Test Set’s ANT IN port
exceeds 60 mW (which is equivalent to 18 dBm). Damage may also
result to the unit-under-test if it is overdriven by the DUPLEX OUT
power level. To avoid damage to the unit under test, enter a low power
level for the DUPLEX OUT level in dBmparameter.
7. Press k1 (Begin Tst).
F igu r e 4-5
Sw ep t Ga in Set u p s
Calibration Setup
Measurement Setup
BASEBAND OUT
DATA
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
5
S
E
R
I
A
L
9
1
BASEBAND OUT
DATA
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
5
S
E
R
I
A
L
9
1
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
LO
LO
HI
HI
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
6
S
E
R
I
A
L
0
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
6
S
E
R
I
A
L
0
I
Q
IN
I
Q
IN
S
E
R
I
A
L
1
1
S
E
R
I
A
L
1
1
ANALOG
MODULATION MONITOR
SCOPE
EXT SCOPE
TRIG IN
VIDEO
OUT
ANALOG
MODULATION MONITOR
SCOPE
EXT SCOPE
TRIG IN
VIDEO
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
16X
16X
CHIP CLOCK CHIP CLOCK
19.6608
1.2288
FRAME
CLOCK
OUT
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
TRIGGER
QUALIFIER
IN
FRAME
CLOCK
OUT
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
TRIGGER
QUALIFIER
IN
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
CHIP CLOCK CHIP CLOCK
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
RF IN/OUT
RF IN/OUT
19.6608
MHz OUT
1.2288
10 MHz
REF OUT
EXT
REF IN
10 MHz
REF OUT
EXT
REF IN
MHz OUT
MHz OUT
MHz OUT
DUPLEX OUT
6dB Pad
ANT IN
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
6dB Pad
6dB Pad
6dB Pad
Test Device
Cal Cable
Cal Cable
sweptg.eps
Barrel
Connector
8. A setup screen appears with a diagram of the necessary connections,
similar to the Calibration Setup of Figure 1-2. This test requires two
6-dB pads (attenuators). The pads are put on the Test Set’s ANT IN
and DUPLEX OUT ports to reduce impedance mismatch error at
these ports. A reference level is obtained by connecting a short
calibration cable between the pads on the DUPLEX OUT and ANT
IN ports. Set up the hardware, then press k1 (Proceed) or the knob
to continue.
9. Another setup screen appears similar to the Measurement Setup of
cable and one of the pads. In this step, a measurement is made of the
additional gain from the reference level. Press k1 (Proceed) or the
knob to continue.
Chapter 4
85
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
10. The trace of the device gain over the frequency range swept is
displayed. If the gain exceeds 40 dB, it will not appear on the trace.
The maximum gain is also displayed as text on the screen. To save
the plot to a PC card, press k4 (Save Plot) and use the knob to enter
a filename. Press k5 (Scr Dump) to send the image to a printer or to
the BTS Laptop Utility. Directions will appear at the top of the
screen. Press PRINT and allow the image to print to the connected
device. Then, press PAUSE/CONTINUE. Press k1(Proceed) when
you are ready to continue.
F igu r e 4-6
Exa m p le of a Sw ep t Ga in P lot Scr een
results. If the BTS Laptop Utility is in use, this data is collected by
the laptop. If you wish to repeat the test using the same calibrated
devices and test parameters, press k1 (Repeat). To re-display the plot
screen, press k3 (Disp Plot). To return to the Select Test Menu,
press k5 (Return).
F igu r e 4-7
Exa m p le of a Sw ep t Ga in R esu lt s Scr een
86
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
Sp ecifica t ion s
•
•
Frequency Range: 0.4-1000 MHz, 1.7-2.0 GHz
Swept Signal Level: -54 dBm to +10 dBm
Discr ete F r equ en cy In ser tion Loss
Mea su r em en t Descr ip t ion
The discrete frequency insertion loss test measures the loss of a cable or
device at a specific frequency. DSP (Digital Signal Processing) is used to
determine the results of this test, making it more accurate than the
Swept Insertion Loss test.
Ma k in g t h e Mea su r em en t
1. Select Discrete Freq Insertion Lossfrom the Select Test (Main)
Menu. The Discrete Frequency Insertion Loss Testmenu will
appear.
F igu r e 4-8
Selectin g th e Discr ete F r eq u en cy In ser tion Loss Test
Select Test Menu
Discrete Frequency
Insertion Loss
2. Position the cursor at Test frequency in MHzand enter the
specific frequency to be tested.
Chapter 4
87
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
3. Position the cursor at DUPLEX OUT Level in dBmand enter the
power level at which the test should be conducted.
4. Press k1 (Begin Tst) to begin the test.
F igu r e 4-9
Discr et e F r equ en cy In ser t ion Loss Set u p s
Calibration Setup
Measurement Setup
BASEBAND OUT
DATA
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
5
S
E
R
I
A
L
9
1
BASEBAND OUT
DATA
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
5
S
E
R
I
A
L
9
1
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
LO
LO
HI
HI
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
6
S
E
R
I
A
L
0
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
6
S
E
R
I
A
L
0
I
Q
IN
I
Q
IN
S
E
R
I
A
L
1
1
S
E
R
I
A
L
1
1
ANALOG
MODULATION MONITOR
SCOPE
EXT SCOPE
TRIG IN
VIDEO
OUT
ANALOG
MODULATION MONITOR
SCOPE
EXT SCOPE
TRIG IN
VIDEO
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
16X
16X
FRAME
CLOCK
OUT
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
TRIGGER
QUALIFIER
IN
CHIP CLOCK FRAME
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
TRIGGER
QUALIFIER
IN
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
CHIP CLOCK CHIP CLOCK
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
CHIP CLOCK
19.6608
RF IN/OUT
RF IN/OUT
19.6608
MHz OUT
1.2288
10 MHz
REF OUT
EXT
REF IN
1.2288
CLOCK
OUT
10 MHz
REF OUT
EXT
REF IN
MHz OUT
MHz OUT
MHz OUT
DUPLEX OUT
6dB Pad
ANT IN
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
6dB Pad
6dB Pad
6dB Pad
Test Cable
or Device
Cal Cable
Cal Cable
sweptg.eps
Barrel
Connector
requires two 6-dB pads. The pads are put on the ANT IN and
DUPLEX OUT ports on the Test Set to reduce impedance mismatch
error at these ports. A reference level is obtained by connecting a
short calibration cable between the pads on the DUPLEX OUT and
ANT IN ports. Press k1 (Proceed).
6. After the Test Set has finished calibrating, a second diagram
appears on the screen. Connect the test cable or device to be tested
between the calibration cable and one of the pads. Press k1
(Proceed).
7. The discrete frequency insertion loss results screen appears with the
results of the test. The loss is expressed as a negative number in this
particular test.
NOTE
The insertion loss at the specified frequency is displayed twice. The
second display is enlarged for easier reading.
8. Press k1 (Proceed) when you are finished with this screen. The
Discrete Frequency Insertion Loss Test menu appears. If you would
like to repeat the measurement press k1 (Begin Tst). The
calibration step will be skipped if none of the parameters were
changed. To exit the test press k5 (Return).
88
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
Sw ep t In ser tion Loss
Mea su r em en t Descr ip t ion
This test measures the loss of a cable or device by sweeping it over the
specified frequency range. This test uses the Spectrum Analyzer to
make measurements.
Ma k in g t h e Mea su r em en t
1. Select Swept Insertion Lossfrom the Select Test (Main) Menu. A
Swept Insertion Loss Information menu will appear.
F igu r e 4-10
Select in g t h e Sw ep t In ser t ion Loss Mea su r em en t
Select Test Menu
Swept Insertion Loss
2. Position the cursor at Start frequency in MHzand select it. Enter
a value for the start of the frequency sweep from 0.4 MHz to
1000 MHz or 1700 MHz to 2000 MHz.
3. Position the cursor at Stop frequency in MHzand select it. Enter a
value from 0.4 MHz to 1000 MHz or 1700 MHz to 2000 MHz. This
value should be larger than the start frequency.
Chapter 4
89
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
4. Position the cursor at Max expected loss in dBand enter the
greatest loss expected through your device. The insertion loss will be
displayed from 0 dB to the value entered in this field. Therefore, if
the Max expected loss in dBis set higher than the measured
insertion loss, the plot will not display any test data. Enter the
appropriate value.
5. Position the cursor at DUPLEX OUT level in dBmand enter the
appropriate value. Unless you are measuring loss through a power
sensitive device, the default level should work correctly.
6. Press k1 (Begin Tst) to begin the test.
F igu r e 4-11
Sw ep t In ser t ion Loss Set u p s
Calibration Setup
Measurement Setup
BASEBAND OUT
DATA
P
P
A
A
R
R
A
A
L
L
L
L
E
E
L
L
P
P
O
O
R
R
T
T
1
1
5
6
S
E
R
I
A
L
9
1
BASEBAND OUT
DATA
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
5
S
E
R
I
A
L
9
1
AUDIO OUT
HI
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
LO
LO
HI
S
E
R
I
A
L
0
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
6
S
E
R
I
A
L
0
I
Q
IN
I
Q
IN
S
E
R
I
A
L
1
1
S
E
R
I
A
L
1
1
ANALOG
MODULATION MONITOR
SCOPE
EXT SCOPE
TRIG IN
VIDEO
OUT
ANALOG
MODULATION MONITOR
SCOPE
EXT SCOPE
TRIG IN
VIDEO
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
16X
16X
FRAME
CLOCK
OUT
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
TRIGGER
QUALIFIER
IN
CHIP CLOCK FRAME
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
TRIGGER
QUALIFIER
IN
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
CHIP CLOCK CHIP CLOCK
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
CHIP CLOCK
19.6608
RF IN/OUT
RF IN/OUT
19.6608
MHz OUT
1.2288
10 MHz
REF OUT
EXT
REF IN
1.2288
CLOCK
OUT
10 MHz
REF OUT
EXT
REF IN
MHz OUT
MHz OUT
MHz OUT
DUPLEX OUT
6dB Pad
ANT IN
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
6dB Pad
6dB Pad
6dB Pad
Test Cable
or Device
Cal Cable
Cal Cable
sweptg.eps
Barrel
Connector
7. A calibration setup screen appears with a diagram of the necessary
pads are put on the ANT IN and DUPLEX OUT ports on the Test Set
to reduce impedance mismatch error at these ports. A reference level
is obtained by connecting a short calibration cable between the pads
on the DUPLEX OUT an ANT IN ports. Setup the hardware, then
press k1 (Proceed) or the knob to continue.
8. After the Test Set has finished calibrating, a second diagram similar
Connect the test cable or device to be tested between the calibration
cable and one of the pads. Press k1 (Proceed) or the knob to
continue.
90
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
9. The trace of the cable loss over the frequency range swept is
displayed. The average loss is also displayed on the screen. To save
the plot to a PC card, press k4 (Save Plot) and use the knob to enter
a filename. Press k5 (Scr Dump) to send the image to a printer or to
the BTS Laptop Utility. Directions will appear at the top of the
screen. Press PRINT and allow the image to print to the connected
device. Then, press PAUSE/CONTINUE. Press k1 (Proceed) when
you are ready to proceed
10.The swept insertion loss results screen appears with the test results.
If the BTS Laptop Utility is in use, this data is collected by the
laptop. If you wish to repeat the test using the same calibrated
devices and test parameters, press k1 (Repeat). To redisplay the plot
screen, press k3(Disp Plot). To return to the Select Test (Main)
Menu, press k5 (Return).
Est im a t in g Sw ep t In ser t ion Loss Usin g a Sin gle Con n ect ion
Rather than directly measuring the transmitted signal (requiring
connections at both ends), a known high-quality short can be put at the
end of the cable. Knowing that this will reflect 100% of the signal, the
loss in dB can simply be divided by 2 to get the system’s estimated
insertion loss. If the return loss is not in dB, the square root of the
measurement would be the system’s insertion loss. An open can also be
used instead of a short, but the results will not be as precise.
Sp ecifica t ion s
•
•
•
Frequency Range: 0.4-1000 MHz, 1.7-2.0 GHz
Swept Signal Level: -54 dBm to +10 dBm
Insertion Loss Accuracy: +/- 0.75 dBm
Chapter 4
91
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
Sw ep t Retu r n Loss
Mea su r em en t Descr ip t ion
Swept return loss is a measure of reflection characteristics. The
purpose of the swept return loss test is to detect problems in the
antenna feedline system and the antenna itself. A portion of the
incident power will be reflected back to the source from each
transmission line fault as well as the antenna. The ratio of the reflected
voltages to the incident voltage is called the reflection coefficient. The
reflection coefficient is a complex number, meaning it has both
magnitude and phase information.
The return loss is defined as the magnitude part of the reflection
coefficient and is expressed in decibels (dB). Therefore, the return loss
is a measure of how large the reflected wave is to the original incident
wave. Remember that this measurement is in terms of loss, therefore a
large number means that very little signal was reflected back. A loss of
0 dB indicates that all of the incident wave is reflected, whereas a
return loss of 40 dB, for example, would indicate that very little of the
signal is reflected. When a device is frequency swept, a graph similar to
transmitting at a particular frequency. It can be seen that the return
loss at that frequency is a very large number which tapers off to small
return losses at all other frequencies.
Another way of looking at the same information is the SWR (also
known as VSWR: Voltage Standing Wave Ratio). VSWR is stated as a
ratio. For example: 1.2:1 or “one point two to one” VSWR. The first
number in the ratio is a value between 1 and infinity. 1 indicates that
none of the incident wave is reflected. Infinity implies that all of the
incident wave is reflected. Therefore, the closer this number is to 1, the
better the feedline system performance. The second number in the ratio
is always one.
Ma k in g t h e Mea su r em en t
NOTE
When testing antennas or cables with antennas attached to them, a test
signal is radiated. Verify that the level and frequency span used for the
test cannot result in interference to other nearby systems.To minimize
interference when running the program, set the power level at the
DUPLEX OUT port to the minimum value needed for good
measurement resolution. Set the frequency range carefully.
1. Select Swept Return Lossfrom the Select Test (Main) Menu. The
Swept Return Loss Information menu will appear.
92
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
F igu r e 4-12
Select in g t h e Sw ep t Ret u r n Loss Mea su r em en t
Select Main Menu
Swept Return Loss
2. Position the cursor at Start frequency in MHz and select it. Enter
a value for the start of the frequency sweep from 0.4 MHz to
1000 MHz or 1700 MHz to 2000 MHz.
3. Position the cursor at Stop frequency in MHzand select it. Enter a
value from 0.4 MHz to 1000 MHz or 1700 MHz to 2000 MHz. This
value should be larger than the start frequency and in the same
frequency band.
4. Position the cursor at Max expected loss in dBand select it. The
return loss will be displayed from 0 dB to the value entered in this
field. Therefore, if the Max expected loss in dBis set higher than
the measured return loss, the plot will not display any test data.
Enter the appropriate value.
5. Position the cursor at DUPLEX OUT Level in dBmand select it.
Enter the power level at which the test should be conducted.
Chapter 4
93
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
CAUTION
Damage may result if the power input to the Test Set’s ANT IN port
exceeds 60 mW (which is equivalent to 18 dBm). Damage may also
result to the unit-under-test if it is overdriven by the DUPLEX OUT
power level. To avoid damage to the ANT IN port, enter an
over-estimate gain value for the Max expected gain in dBparameter.
To avoid damage to the unit under test, ensure a low power level for the
DUPLEX OUT level in dBmparameter.
6. Press k1 (Begin Tst) or position the cursor at Beginand select it.
F igu r e 4-13
Sw ep t R et u r n Loss Set u p s
Calibration Setup
Measurement Setup
BASEBAND OUT
DATA
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
5
S
E
R
I
A
L
9
1
BASEBAND OUT
DATA
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
5
S
E
R
I
A
L
9
1
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
LO
LO
HI
HI
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
6
S
E
R
I
A
L
0
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
6
S
E
R
I
A
L
0
I
Q
IN
I
Q
IN
S
E
R
I
A
L
1
1
S
E
R
I
A
L
1
1
ANALOG
MODULATION MONITOR
SCOPE
EXT SCOPE
TRIG IN
VIDEO
OUT
ANALOG
MODULATION MONITOR
SCOPE
EXT SCOPE
TRIG IN
VIDEO
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
16X
16X
FRAME
CLOCK
OUT
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
TRIGGER
QUALIFIER
IN
CHIP CLOCK FRAME
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
TRIGGER
QUALIFIER
IN
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
CHIP CLOCK CHIP CLOCK
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
CHIP CLOCK
19.6608
RF IN/OUT
RF IN/OUT
19.6608
MHz OUT
1.2288
10 MHz
REF OUT
EXT
REF IN
1.2288
CLOCK
OUT
10 MHz
REF OUT
EXT
REF IN
MHz OUT
MHz OUT
MHz OUT
DUPLEX OUT
6dB Pad
DUPLEX OUT
6dB Pad
ANT IN
ANT IN
6dB Pad
6dB Pad
VSWR Bridge
VSWR Bridge
REFL.
IN
REFL.
IN
OUT
OUT
TEST PORT
TEST PORT
Short
Attach device to
be tested.
sretloss.eps
7. A setup screen appears with a diagram of the necessary connections,
obtain a reference level for the device being tested. A VSWR bridge
or a directional coupler and two 6 dB pads are connected to the Test
Set. The pads are used to reduce impedance mismatch errors
between the VSWR bridge and the DUPLEX OUT and ANT IN ports
on the Test Set. A reference level is measured first with a short on
the DUT (Device Under Test) port of the VSWR bridge. An open can
be used as well, but the open must not be blocked in any way that
might cause the signal to be reflected back. For example, using the
open setup inside a van or other enclosed area may introduce
inaccuracies in the measurement. Setup the hardware, then press
k1 (Proceed) or the knob to continue.
8. Another setup screen appears. Attach the device being tested. Press
k1 (Proceed) or the knob to continue.
94
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
9. The plot screen appears. The trace showing return loss over the
frequency band selected is displayed on the screen. Measured values
for best and worst case return loss and VSWR are printed at the top
of the screen. To save the plot to a PC card, press k4 (Save Plot) and
use the knob to enter a filename. Press k5 (Scr Dump) to send the
image to a printer or to the BTS Laptop Utility. Directions will
appear at the top of the screen. Press PRINT and allow the image to
print to the connected device. Then, press PAUSE/CONTINUE.
Press k1 (Proceed) when you are ready to proceed.
F igu r e 4-14
Exa m p le of a Sw ep t R et u r n Loss P lot Scr een
10.The swept return loss results screen appears with the test results. If
the BTS Laptop Utility is in use, this data is collected by the laptop.
If you wish to repeat the test using the same calibrated devices and
test parameters, press k1 (Repeat). To redisplay the plot screen,
press k3 (Disp Plot). To return to the Select Test (Main)Menu,
press k5 (Return).
Chapter 4
95
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
F igu r e 4-15
Exa m p le of a n Sw ep t Ret u r n Loss r esu lt s scr een
E st im a t in g An t en n a R et u r n Loss
If you are measuring the return loss of an antenna connected to the end
of a known good feed line, you can determine the approximate return
loss of the antenna by subtracting twice the line loss. For example, if
you measure a return loss of 24 dB and the line is known to have 2 dB
loss, the estimated return loss of the antenna is 20 dB (since there is a
total of 4 dB of loss from the feed line). For this estimate to be correct,
the coaxial line and connectors must have a much smaller loss than the
total return loss.
Sp ecifica t ion s
•
•
•
Frequency Range: 0.4-1000 MHz, 1.7-2.0 GHz
Swept Signal Level: -54 dBm to +10 dBm
Swept Return Loss Accuracy: +/- 2dB +/--10% of reading, for
readings between 0 dB and 30 dB
96
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
Ca ble F a u lt
Mea su r em en t Descr ip t ion
A frequency-swept signal is transmitted from the DUPLEX OUT port of
the Test Set through a resistive power divider to the cable-under-test.
The signals reflected from faults in the cable are combined in the power
divider with the transmitted signal and received at the ANT IN port.
The changing interference of the transmitted and reflected signals, over
the swept frequency band, contains information about the distance to
one or more faults. The software uses a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT)
to convert the frequency domain into the time domain. The information
in the time domain can be used to find the physical distances. The
distance displayed on the Test Set’s CRT is the physical distance to the
fault with correction for the velocity factor of the cable. This test allows
the operator to identify, characterize, and isolate potential problem
locations by viewing it in units of distance.
NOTE
Test Signal Can Cause Interference
When testing cables attached to antennas, test signals will be radiated.
Verify that the signal used for the test cannot result in interference to
another antenna.
Chapter 4
97
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
Ma k in g t h e Mea su r em en t
1. Select Cable Faultfrom the Select Test (Main) Menu. The Cable
Fault Information menu will appear.
F igu r e 4-16
Select in g t h e Ca ble F a u lt Mea su r em en t
Select Main Menu
Cable Fault Measurement
2. Position the cursor at Sweep center frequency (MHz)and select.
A Choicesmenu appears.
• 505 MHz- Use this center frequency for high resolution, short
range cable tests. The cable lengths can range from 10 to 1000 ft.
• 850 MHz- Use this center frequency for cable tests at cellular
frequencies. This should be used for frequency sensitive devices,
such as filters, and has a cable length range of 150 to 1000 ft.
• 1850 MHz- Use this center frequency for cable tests at PCS
frequencies. This should also be used for frequency sensitive
devices and has a cable length range of 150 to 1000 ft.
3. Position the cursor at Cable lengthand enter the appropriate
value.
98
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
NOTE
The greatest accuracy is obtained when you enter a cable length
slightly greater than the cable length begin tested. If you are not sure of
the cable length, enter a value 1.5 times the estimated length.
Depending on the return loss of the antenna or device at the end of the
cable, you may see a high relative mismatch displayed at the actual
length of the cable. For example, a 50 foot cable was tested to generate
4. Position the cursor at Cable length units. Pressing the knob
toggles the selection between feet and meters.
5. Position the cursor at Cable classand select it. A Choicesmenu
appears allowing selection of Heliax, RG, and custom options. Select
the appropriate cable class. (They can also be selected by pressing
k1 (HELIAX), k3 (RG), or k5 (Custom).
6. The next menu varies depending on Cable class:
•
If Heliaxis selected: Position the cursor at Cable typeand
select. A Choicesmenu appears with foam, air, and flex of
varying thickness. Use the knob to select the desired cable type.
•
•
If RGis selected: Position the cursor at Cable typewith the
example [RG 58/U = 58] and select.
If Customis selected:
a. Position the cursor at Cable velocity propagation const
and select it. Enter the appropriate value. Cables that use
polyethylene dielectric typically have a propagation velocity of
0.66, cables that use a teflon dielectric typically have a
propagation velocity of 0.70. The propagation velocity must be
a value between 0 and 1.
b. Position the cursor at Cable atten. dB/100 ft. (or
meters) at 500 MHzand select it.
c. If the cable attenuation is unknown, enter 0 dB per 100 feet (or
meters). Entering 0 dB/100 will produce return loss values
lower than actual, but fault distance can be accurately
detected.
7. Press k1 (Begin Tst).
Chapter 4
99
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
F igu r e 4-17
Ca ble F a u lt Set u p s
Calibration Setup
Measurement Setup
BASEBAND OUT
DATA
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
5
S
E
R
I
A
L
9
1
BASEBAND OUT
DATA
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
5
S
E
R
I
A
L
9
1
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
LO
LO
HI
HI
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
6
S
E
R
I
A
L
0
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
O
R
T
1
6
S
E
R
I
A
L
0
I
Q
IN
I
Q
IN
S
E
R
I
A
L
1
1
S
E
R
I
A
L
1
1
ANALOG
MODULATION MONITOR
SCOPE
EXT SCOPE
TRIG IN
VIDEO
OUT
ANALOG
MODULATION MONITOR
SCOPE
EXT SCOPE
TRIG IN
VIDEO
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
16X
16X
FRAME
CLOCK
OUT
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
TRIGGER
QUALIFIER
IN
CHIP CLOCK FRAME
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
TRIGGER
QUALIFIER
IN
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
CHIP CLOCK CHIP CLOCK
ANT IN
DUPLEX OUT
CHIP CLOCK
19.6608
RF IN/OUT
RF IN/OUT
19.6608
MHz OUT
1.2288
10 MHz
REF OUT
EXT
REF IN
1.2288
CLOCK
OUT
10 MHz
REF OUT
EXT
REF IN
MHz OUT
MHz OUT
MHz OUT
DUPLEX OUT
DUPLEX OUT
ANT IN
ANT IN
Resistive Splitter
Resistive Splitter
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
50 Ohm
Termination
Attach device to
be tested.
cablef.eps
8. A setup screen appears with a diagram of the necessary connections
2-way resistive device. Press k1 (Proceed) or the knob after the
hardware is connected.
9. After the Test Set has finished calibrating, a second diagram
appears on the screen. Connect the cable to be tested. Press
k1 (Proceed) or the knob to continue.
the plot to a PC card, press k4 (Save Plot) and use the knob to enter
a filename. Press k5 (Scr Dump) to send the image to a printer or to
the BTS Laptop Utility. Directions will appear at the top of the
screen. Press PRINT and allow the image to print to the connected
device. Then, press PAUSE/CONTINUE. Press k1 (Proceed) when
you are ready to continue.
100
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
F igu r e 4-18
Exa m p le of a Ca b le F a u lt P lot Scr een
11.The cable fault result screen appears with the test results (see
data is collected by the laptop. If you wish to repeat the test using
the same calibrated devices and test parameters, press k1 (Repeat).
To re-display the plot screen, press k3 (Disp Plot). To return to the
Select Test (Main) Menu, press k5 (Return).
F igu r e 4-19
Exa m p le of a Ca b le F a u lt R esu lt s Scr een
Chapter 4
101
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
Typ ica l ca b le fa u lt r et u r n loss m ea su r em en t s
Return loss is a ratio of input power to reflected power. For example, if
100 Watts was applied to a cable and 10 Watts was returned, the return
loss is 10 dB (10 log(100/10)). In the same example, if 1 Watt was
returned, the return loss is 20 dB (10 log(100/1)). Typical return loss
measurements for the cable loss test are listed below:
•
•
•
•
Open-Circuit Cable = 0 dB (ignoring line loss)
Short-Circuit Cable = 0 dB (ignoring line loss)
50-Ohm Terminated Cable = 40 to 60 dB
Antenna = 10 to 20 dB (in the frequency band for which it was
designed)
Return loss measurements greater than 20 dB should be considered
good.
Ca ble F a u lt P er for m a n ce
Measurements of the cable fault location can typically be made up to
500 feet on low-loss cables and 300 feet on higher-loss cables.
Resolution of the fault location is approximately 0.4 feet for cable
lengths up to 50 feet and then linearly increases to 4 feet for a 500 foot
cable.
Sp ecifica t ion s
•
•
•
Cable Types Tested: Heliax, RG, Custom
Cable Length Range: 0 to 1000 feet, 0 to 300 meters
Distance accuracy: +/-5% of the cable length value entered by the
user
Rep lot Da ta F iles
This utility allows you to easily retrieve and display plots which were
previously stored on an SRAM PC card. One or two plots may be
displayed at one time. No measurements are performed.
102
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
F igu r e 4-20
Rep lot Da t a F iles
Select Main Menu
Chapter 4
103
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
Tr a n sfer Stor ed Da ta
This utility may be used to easily transfer data collection files (test
results) from an SRAM PC card over the serial, parallel, or GPIB port.
You do not need to write an IBasic program. No measurements are
performed.
F igu r e 4-21
Tr a n sfer St or ed Da t a Scr een
Select Main Menu
104
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
SA (Sp ectr u m An a lyzer ) Self Ca libr a tion ON/OF F
This menu item allows you to check the calibration status of the Test
Set’s spectrum analyzer, and change the status if you desire.
F igu r e 4-22
SA Self Ca lib r a t ion OF F /ON Scr een
Select Main Menu
The RFTOOLS program uses the Test Set’s internal spectrum analyzer
for making swept network analyzer measurements. The internal
spectrum analyzer performs an automatic self calibration every 5
minutes. This automatic self calibration ensures that the spectrum
analyzer operates within specified limits regardless of the operating
temperature. However, this self calibration can introduce inaccuracy in
spectrum analyzer output after the Test Set is operating at a constant
temperature (after approximately 30 minutes).
Chapter 4
105
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
Each RFTOOLS test includes two parts: calibration and measurement.
If the spectrum analyzer performs a self calibration between the
calibration and measurement of the RFTOOLS test, the spectrum
analyzer ’s automatic self calibration instability will increase RFTOOLS
test measurement error. To avoid this problem, you may use this menu
item to turn off the spectrum analyzer ’s self calibration. This self
calibration should only be turned off after the unit has reached a
constant powered-on operating temperature (approximately 30 minutes
after power-on), therefore it is probably best to leave it on. After 30
minutes, turning the self calibration off will improve the measurement
accuracy of RFTOOLS tests.
Ca ta log P C (Mem or y) Ca r d
This utility lists all the files contained on the PC card. The PC card that
you want to catalog must be inserted prior to selecting this test.
File types are denoted by the following suffixes:
•
•
•
•
•
.PGM suffix denotes a program code file
.LIB suffix denotes a library file
.PRC suffix denotes a procedure file
.DAT suffix denotes a data file
.PLT suffix denotes a plot file
106
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the RF Tools Program
F igu r e 4-23
Ca t a log Mem or y Ca r d Scr een
Select Main Menu
Chapter 4
107
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Code Domain Analyzer
Usin g th e Cod e Dom a in An a lyzer
The code domain analyzer has two display modes, selected in the Inst
Config screen:
•
IS-95 – corresponding to the standard that specifies 64 channels in
the Hadamard (consecutive integer) ordering. This code domain view
graphically displays the power, phase, and timing of the CDMA
signal’s 64 Walsh channels.
•
IS-2000 – corresponding to the standard that specifies 128 Walsh
codes. This code domain view graphically displays power, fast power,
power & noise and complex power of the CDMA signal’s 128 Walsh
codes.
Select in g th e Cod e Dom a in An a lyzer ’s Con t r ols
Men u s
Several levels of menus are used to access the various controls
Applications Guide for more information about code domain
measurements.
108
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Code Domain Analyzer
F igu r e 4-24
Cod e Dom a in An a lyzer Men u s – IS-95
Chapter 4
109
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Code Domain Analyzer
F igu r e 4-25
Cod e Dom a in An a lyzer Men u s – IS-2000
110
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Spectrum Analyzer
Usin g th e Sp ectr u m An a lyzer
Au tom a tic Ca lib r a tion
During operation, the spectrum analyzer pauses for approximately
2 seconds every 5 minutes to recalibrate itself. This does not affect the
accuracy of displayed measurements, but does cause a brief
interruption of the displayed information during the process.
Settin g Resolu t ion Ba n d w id th a n d Sw eep R a te
The resolution bandwidth and sweep rate are determined by the span
setting, and cannot be set independently.
These settings are listed in the following table.
Ta ble 4-1
Rela t ion sh ip b et w een Sp a n , R esolu t ion Ba n d w id t h , a n d Sw eep
Ra te
Sp a n
R esolu t ion BW
(k Hz)
Sw eep R a t e
<50 kHz
<200 kHz
<1.5 MHz
<3 MHz
0.3
28.6 kHz/second
329.0 kHz/second
3.0 MHz/second
21.4 MHz/second
36.3 MHz/second
257.0 MHz/second
1.0 GHz/second
1.0
3.0
30.0
30.0
300.0
300.0
<18 MHz
<200 MHz
1 GHz
Chapter 4
111
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Spectrum Analyzer
Select in g th e Sp ectr u m An a lyzer ’s Con tr ols Men u s
Several levels of menus are used to access the various controls
description for each field on the spectrum analyzer ’s menus.
F igu r e 4-26
Sp ect r u m An a lyzer Con t r ols Men u s
112
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Spectrum Analyzer
Usin g t h e Sp ect r u m An a lyzer ’s Delta Ma r k er s
Delta markers are displayed when the Norm/Deltafield on the
spectrum analyzers Markermenu is set to Delta.
The delta makers are positioned in the same way as the normal
markers using the Markermenu of the spectrum analyzer screen. See
When the delta maker is activated, the Marker To Peak, Next Peak,
Center Freq, and Ref Levelfields control only the delta marker.
• Peakor Next Peak- The normal marker remains stationary. When a
delta marker to center frequency measurement would move the
reference marker off the screen, the measurement is aborted and the
following message is displayed: Attempt to move Reference
Marker off the screen.
• Center Freqor Ref Level- The normal marker moves as necessary
to stay at the same signal frequency when the spectrum display
changes.
Delta F r eq u en cy
The delta marker frequency measurement (Delta Mrkr Freq) is the
frequency of the delta marker minus the frequency of the normal
marker. If the delta marker is to the right of the normal marker, the
delta frequency is positive. If the delta marker is to the left of the
normal marker, the delta frequency is negative.
The units for this measurement are GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz.
Delt a Level
The delta marker level measurement (Delta Mrkr Lvl) is the level of
the normal marker minus the level of the delta marker in dBm. If the
delta marker is higher than normal marker, the delta level is positive.
If the delta marker is lower than the normal marker, the delta level is
negative.
The units for this measurement are dB. (There is a percent unit
available; however, since the spectrum analyzer level is always
displayed on a logarithmic scale, linear units are inappropriate.)
Chapter 4
113
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Spectrum Analyzer
Refer en ce Ma r k er (R ef Mr k r ) Level a n d F r equ en cy
In the delta marker mode, a second (reference) marker is placed at the
current location of the marker. The first marker becomes a moveable
delta marker. When the delta marker is moved, the difference in
frequency and level between the reference marker and the delta marker
are shown as the Delta Mrkrmeasurements on the right-hand side of
the screen. The reference marker can be set to either Holdor Norm.
When the Ref Mrkrfield is set to Hold, the reference marker is frozen
at its current position (frequency and level) regardless of changes in the
signal level. This is useful for measuring multiple off-air carriers and
looking at the difference in power levels. The reference marker can also
be used when zeroing return loss.
When you switch from Holdto Norm, the reference marker will stay at
its current horizontal setting (frequency), but will track the level of the
incoming signal.
When switching from delta mode to normal mode, the delta marker
becomes the normal marker.
114
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Spectrum Analyzer
Usin g t h e Sp ect r u m An a lyzer Ma sk
The spectrum analyzer mask consists of two adjustable limit lines.
They show the upper and lower limits of spectral occupancy. You can
choose to set and display either upper or lower limits for the mask, or
both. When the mask is turned on, it continuously monitors the signal
spectrum with respect to these limits and indicates a failure when the
spectrum exceeds these limits. A “Fail” message, along with a beep (if
activated), indicates a failure. “Pass” is displayed if the signal remains
within the limits of the mask.
Disp la yin g t h e Sp ect r u m An a lyzer Ma sk
1. On the SPEC ANL screen, set the Controlsfield to MASK. (See
instructions.)
2. Set the Displayfield to show the mask on the screen, and to indicate
which limits you want to measure against.
• Upper Only
• Lower Only
• Both
Setting this field to Offturns off the mask and the pass/fail
indicator.
3. Set the Mask Type field to the type of mask you want to measure
against.
•
Fix sets the mask to absolute limits defined in the #Pts,
EditPoint, Lvl, and Freqfields. When using fixed limits a
change in the center frequency or level may cause the mask to
move beyond the viewable area of the screen.
• Relsets the mask relative to the center frequency and reference
level defined in the Center Freqand Ref Lvlfields on the
spectrum analyzer ’s Maincontrols menu.
You can define two masks, one fixed and one relative and switch
between the two using this field.
Chapter 4
115
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Spectrum Analyzer
Defin in g t h e F ixed Ma sk ’s Lim it s
1. Set the Edit Maskfield to the limit you want to edit (Upperor
Lower).
You might want to set the Mask Beepfield to Offwhile you are
defining the mask.
2. Set the Mask Typefield to Fix.
3. Set the #Ptsfield to the number of points you want defined by the
mask. You can define up to 15 points. The starting point is always
the left graticule on the display, and the end point is always the right
graticule on the display.
To define a straight-line mask, set the number of points to 1. The
default mask is a straight line at the top of the display.
4. Set the EditPtfield to the point you want to define.
5. Set the Lvland Freqfields to the frequency and level you want for
the point you chose in the EditPointfield.
follows:
Ta ble 4-2
P oin t
Level
F r eq u en cy
1
2
3
4
−50 dBm
1 dBm
1799.7000
1799.7000
1 dBm
1800.3000
−50 dBm
1800.3000 MHz
F igu r e 4-27
Set t in g t h e Sp ect r u m An a lyzer Ma sk
Set number of point here.
Point 2
Select which point to set
or edit.
Point 3
Point 4
Set the level of the
Point 1
Set the frequency of the
point.
Turn the beeper off or on.
Read the pass/fail
samask.pcx
116
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Spectrum Analyzer
Defin in g t h e R ela t ive Ma sk ’s Lim it s
1. Set the Edit Maskfield to the limit you want to edit (Upperor
Lower).
You might want to set the Mask Beepfield to Offwhile you are
defining the mask.
2. Set the Mask Typefield to Rel.
3. Set the #Ptsfield to the number of points you want defined by the
mask. The starting point is always the left graticule on the display,
and the end point is always the right graticule on the display.
To define a straight-line mask, set the number of points to 1.
The default mask is a straight line at the top of the display.
4. Set the EditPtfield to the point you want to define.
5. Set the Level Ofsand Freq Ofsfields to the frequency and level
offsets you want for the point you chose in the EditPtfield.
The offsets are relative to the frequency and level set in the Center
Freqand Ref Levelfields on the spectrum analyzer ’s Maincontrols
menu.
set the Level Ofsand Freq Ofs.
Tu r n in g Off t h e Ma sk
1. Set the Displayfield to Offto turn off the spectrum analyzer mask.
Tu r n in g Off t h e Ma sk ’s F a ilu r e Beep er
1. Set the Mask Beepfield to Offto turn off the beeping failure
indicator.
Chapter 4
117
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Voltmeter and Audio Frequency Counter
Usin g th e Voltm eter a n d Au d io F r equ en cy
Cou n ter
The voltmeter can be used to measure ac and dc voltages. The input to
the voltmeter is determined by the AF Anl Infield on the AF
ANALYZER screen.
To measure external voltages:
1. Select the AF ANALYZER screen.
2. Set the AF Anl In field to Audio In.
3. Set the Audio In Lo field to match the source you are measuring
(600 ohm impedance, floating output amplifier, ground referenced
4. Connect the signal to be measured to the AUDIO IN connector(s).
The AUDIO IN HI connector can be used alone as long as the Audio
In Lofield is set to Gnd. The AUDIO IN LO connector must also be
used if the Audio In Lofield is set to 600 to Hior Float.
•
•
Select DC Levelto display the dc level.
Select AF Freqto display the audio frequency.
F igu r e 4-28
Mea su r in g AC a n d DC Volt a ges
AC Level
Set to
DC Level or
AF Freq.
Set to
Audio In.
Set to match
source.
118
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Oscilloscope (Scope)
Usin g th e Oscilloscop e (Scop e)
The built-in 50 kHz oscilloscope provides
•
•
•
multiple triggering formats (internal and external)
single-shot and pre-trigger viewing for single events
full marker capability with automatic level and time readout
Time/division, volts/division and vertical offset are displayed and can be
changed using the front-panel knob.
Input to the oscilloscope is provided from various sources including
direct inputs to the AUDIO IN (HI and LO) and ANALOG
MODULATION IN connectors. Oscilloscope functions are accessed from
the AF ANALYZER and SCOPE screens.
F igu r e 4-29
In p u t s a n d F ilt er s for t h e Oscilloscop e
Controlled by
AF Anl In
field
FM Demod
Controlled by
Scope To
field
Input
AM Demod
SSB Demod
Audio In connector
Ext Mod connector
FM Mod
Filters
To
Scope
De-emp
AM Mod
To
Notch
Scope Monitor
Output connector
Audio Out
Chapter 4
119
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Oscilloscope (Scope)
Select in g th e Oscilloscop e’s In p u t
Step 1. Press Shift, then RF Anl (AF Anl) to select the AF ANALYZER screen.
Step 2. Select the AF Anl Infield. A list of choices appears.
Step 3. Select the desired input to the scope:
• FM Demodfor FM demodulated audio from input signals connected to
the RF IN/OUT or ANT IN connectors.
• AM Demodfor AM demodulated audio from input signals connected to
the RF IN/OUT or ANT IN connectors.
• SSB Demod for SSB demodulated audio from input signals connected
to the RF IN/OUT or ANT IN connectors.
• Audio Infor a signal connected to the AUDIO IN connector.
• Ext Modfor a signal connected to the ANALOG MODULATION IN
connector.
• FM Modfor the FM modulated audio from the RF generator section.
• AM Modfor the AM modulated audio from the RF generator section.
• Audio Out for the signal present at the SCOPE MONITOR
OUTPUT connector.
The input to the oscilloscope is displayed on the SCOPE screen.
120
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the Oscilloscope (Scope)
Select in g th e Oscilloscop e’s F ilter s
Step 1. Press Shift, then RF Anl (AF Anl) to select the AF ANALYZER screen.
Step 2. Select the Scope Tofield. A list of choices should appear.
Step 3. Select the desired filtering for the signal:
• Inputif you want no filtering (dc coupled)
• Filtersto route the audio to the oscilloscope after passing through
Filters 1 and 2 (ac coupled).
• De-empto route the audio to the oscilloscope after passing through
Filters 1 and 2, and the de-emphasis circuitry (ac coupled).
• Notchto route the audio to the oscilloscope after passing through
Filters #1 and #2, the de-emphasis circuitry, and notch circuitry (ac
coupled).
Tr igger in g th e Oscilloscop e
You can control following triggering features of the oscilloscope:
•
•
•
•
•
Trigger external or internal
Automated or normal triggering
Continuous or single shot triggering
Trigger level
Trigger delay
The oscilloscope is triggered using the Trigger menu. Select this menu
with the following procedure:
Step 1. Press Shift, then Spec Anl (Scope) to go to the SCOPE screen.
Step 2. Select the Controlsfield, then choose Triggerfrom the list of choices.
Usin g t h e Oscilloscop e’s Ma r k er
The marker is used to help you make measurements with the
oscilloscope. By repositioning the marker, you can measure the level
and time.
The marker is controlled using the marker menu. Select this menu with
the following procedure:
Step 1. Press Shift, then Spec Anl (Scope)to go to the SCOPE screen.
Step 2. Select the Controlsfield, the choose Markerfrom the list of choices.
Chapter 4
121
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using IB_UTIL Programs
Usin g IB_UTIL P r ogr a m s
information about the RAM_MANAGER program.
COP Y_P L
The COPY_PL program allows you to copy procedures and libraries
from one PC card to another. See the Agilent Technologies 8935
Programmer ’s Guide for more information about procedures and
libraries.
F ILE_XF ER
The FILE_XFER (file transfer) program transfers files on a PC card to a
device attached to either the GPIB or to SERIAL PORT 9.
RAM_USAGE
The RAM_USAGE program lists the following information about the
Test Set’s RAM:
•
•
•
•
Total RAM installed
RAM disk allocations
Save register allocations
Approximate RAM available for IBASIC programs
122
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Securing a Test Procedure
Secu r in g a Test P r oced u r e
The password option for securing a test procedure is accessed by
loading and running the SECURE_ITROM program. This program is
accessed by running the IB_UTILprogram.
Step 1. Select the SOFTWARE MENU screen.
Step 2. Select the Select Procedure Location:field and choose ROM.
Step 3. Select the Select Procedure Filename:field.
a . Select IB_UTILfrom the list of programs. Press Run Testto display
a list of procedures; select SECURE_ITand follow directions to secure
the desired information.
Chapter 4
123
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Clearing RAM
Clea r in g RAM
RAM can be cleared using the RAM_MANAGERprogram in the Test Set’s
ROM. This program clears all RAM, including any SAVE/RECALL
registers saved to InternalRAM.
This program is accessed by running the IB_UTILprogram.
Step 1. Select the SOFTWARE MENU screen.
Step 2. Select the Select Procedure Location:field and choose ROM.
Step 3. Select the Select Procedure Filename:field.
•
Select IB_UTILfrom the list of programs. Press Run Testto display
a list of procedures; select RAM_MANAGERand follow directions to clear
RAM.
To preserve the SAVE/RECALL registers, do not use the RAM_MANAGER
program. Instead, load any other test program from a card or from RAM
to clear the previous test program, and then reload the desired test.
registers.
124
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the LISTOPTS (list options) Program
Usin g th e LISTOP TS (list op tion s) P r ogr a m
You can list the options that are installed in your Test Set (if any) using
the LISTOPTS program. LISTOPTS also displays the firmware version
of your Test Set.
Follow the steps below to run the LISTOPTS program
Step 1. Select the SOFTWARE MENU screen.
Step 2. Select the Select Procedure Location:field and choose ROM.
Step 3. Select the Select Procedure Filename:field.
Step 4. Select LISTOPTSfrom the list of programs.
Step 5. Press Run Testto run the program and follow the directions on the
screen.
Chapter 4
125
Overview of theTest Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the DEMO Program
Usin g th e DEMO P r ogr a m
You can use the DEMO program to learn about the capabilities of the
Test Set. This program demonstrates some of the most useful features
of the Test Set.
Follow the steps below to run the DEMO program
Step 1. Select the SOFTWARE MENU screen.
Step 2. Select the Select Procedure Location:field and choose ROM.
Step 3. Select the Select Procedure Filename:field.
Step 4. Select DEMOfrom the list of programs.
Step 5. Press Run Testto run the program and follow the directions on the
screen.
126
Chapter 4
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Tools.fm
Overview of the Test Set’s Built-In Tools
Using the ST_PLT (store or plot) Program
Usin g th e ST_P LT (stor e or p lot) P r ogr a m
This program allows you to store a spectrum analyzer, or oscilloscope
trace. The storage medium can be either a memory card or internal
RAM. PC card or to plot a stored trace from a PC card.
Before running the program the test set must be setup to display the
spectrum analyzer or oscilloscope trace as you want it plotted. They you
run the ST_PLT program. Follow the steps below to run the ST_PLT
program.
Step 1. Select the SOFTWARE MENU screen.
Step 2. Select the Select Procedure Location:field and choose ROM.
Step 3. Select the Select Procedure Filename:field.
Step 4. Select ST_PLTfrom the list of programs.
Step 5. Press k1 (Run Test) to run the program, instructions will be displayed
on the Test Set display.
Step 6. Select the storage medium, either memory card (k1, Card) or an
external disk drive (k5, Disk) connected to the GPIB connector.
NOTE
To use an GPIB disk drive, the instrument must be a sole controller.
The program will prompt you.
Step 7. Select k1 Store OSC, k2 Store SA, or k4 Plot. You must first store a
trace before plotting.
Step 8. After the trace is acquired, type a name of nine characters or less using
the knob to select the character. Select Done with the knob when
finished.
Step 9. Rerun ST_PLT by selecting k1 Run.
St ep 10. Select k5 Plot, then select the file name using the knob. The trace will
now be plotted on the screen.
St ep 11. If you want the grid to show with the trace, select k4 Plotgrid. If you
want to view the plot parameters, center frequency, V per division, etc.,
select k2 Show Info. If you want to exit, select k1 Done.
Chapter 4
127
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
130
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
CDMA Mea su r em en ts
Aver a ge P ow er Mea su r em en ts
Avg P w r
Avg Pwrdisplays the average power level of all signals at the RF
IN/OUT port. The units (watts, volts, or dBm) can be changed by
positioning the cursor in front of the units field and then pressing the
Technologies 8935 CDMA Base Station Tests Applications Guide for
more information about average power measurements.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
•
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
ADC F S
ADC FSis displayed when average power is measured. ADC FS
indicates how close the measured power level is to the maximum
allowed input level at the RF IN/OUT port for a particular Pwr Gain
setting (on the CDMA ANALYZER screen). Changes to ADC FS can be
made by altering the Pwr Gainfield setting and by altering the signal
level into the RF IN/OUT port. ADC FS should be between −1.0 and
−10dB when the Pwr Gainfield is set to Auto, and can be manually set
up to −0.5 dB when set to Hold. The measurement will be aborted if
ADC FS goes above −0.5 dB. Measurement accuracy may be degraded if
ADC FS goes below −10 dB.
Scr een s on w h ich ADC F S is d isp la yed in con ju n ct ion s w it h
Aver a ge P ow er m ea su r em en t s
•
•
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
Chapter 5
131
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
Ad ja cen t Ch a n n el P ow er Mea su r em en ts
ACP
Adjacent channel power can be measured at frequency offsets of 0 to
3 MHz, and filter bandwidths of 10 kHz to 1.23 MHz with 100 Hz
resolution. This measurement returns three, channel-tuned power
values:
• Center Channel- the channel power at the center frequency
• Upper ACP Ratio- the ratio of the total power in the specified
bandwidth at the specified offset above the center frequency, to the
power at the center frequency.
• Lower ACP Ratio- the ratio of the total power in the specified
bandwidth at the specified offset below the center frequency, to the
power at the center frequency.
NOTE
This measurement must be calibrated using the ACP Calfield each
time the tune frequency is changed. You must always remove power at
the ANT IN or RF IN/OUT connector before calibrating channel power
to ensure accurate calibration.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is m a d e:
•
•
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
Ch a n n el P ow er Mea su r em en ts
Ch a n P w r
Channel power can be measured using one of two filters selected with
the Ch Pwr Filtfield on the CDMA ANALYZER screen:
• 1.23M- Channel power is the absolute power level of the RF signal
in a 1.2 3MHz bandwidth centered around the RF channel or tune
frequency setting.
• 30kHz- Channel Power measures the power in a 30 kHz band.
NOTE
This measurement must be calibrated using the Chan Pwr Calfield
each time the tune frequency is changed. You must always remove
power at the ANT IN or RF IN/OUT connector before calibrating
channel power to ensure accurate calibration.
Refer to the Agilent Technologies 8935 CDMA Base Station Tests
Applications Guide for more information about channel power
measurements.
132
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
ADC F S
ADC FSis displayed when channel power is measured. ADC FS
indicates how close the measured power level is to the maximum
allowed input level at the RF IN/OUT port for a particular Gainsetting
(on the CDMA ANALYZER screen). Changes to ADC FS can be made by
altering the Gainfield setting and by altering the signal level into the
RF IN/OUT port. ADC FS should be between −1.0 and −0.5 dB.
Measurement accuracy may be degraded if ADC FS goes below −10 dB
when the Gainfield is set to Auto, and can be manually set up to −0.5
dB when set to Hold. The measurement will be aborted if ADC FS goes
above.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
•
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
Rh o Mea su r em en ts
Rh o
Rho is a measure of CDMA waveform quality which indicates how well
the measured signal (the pilot signal transmitted by the base station
under test) correlates with the ideal reference waveform (the ideal pilot
generated by the Test Set which is mathematically perfect). This
measurement is done through a complex DSP algorithm. Perfect
correlation is when rho is equal to 1. The CDMA standard specifies
0.912 as the minimum accepted performance for CDMA base stations.
To make rho measurements, the base station needs to be configured to
transmit only a pilot signal. The test equipment is then triggered by
any of the selectable CDMA clocks.
Many different factors can contribute to rho failure, including:
•
•
•
•
compression in the linear power amplifier
phase non-linearities (group delay)
Chapter 5
133
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
F igu r e 5-1
Rh o
Powerthatcorrelateswithideal
=
ρ
TotalPower
SignalPower
ρ
ρ
=
>
SignalPower+ErrorPower
0.912
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
•
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
E st im a t ed R h o (E st R h o)
Estimated rho is an calculated approximation of rho that is made
without taking the base station out of service.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
F r equ en cy E r r or (F r eq E r r )
Frequency error is displayed when the Rhomeasurement is selected.
Frequency error is the difference between the base station’s transmitter
frequency and the frequency you enter in the Tune Freqfield.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
•
•
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
134
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
Tim e Offset
Time offset is displayed when the Rhomeasurement is selected. Time
offset is the time difference between the base station’s even second and
the start of the short sequence. It indicates how well your transmitter ’s
signal is time-aligned to system time. Time offset is measured at the
base station’s antenna. The displayed value is based on the value
time offset of zero. The beginning of the received data block aligns with
the first pilot PN chip of the reference signal. Zero time offset indicates
that the trigger event to the CDMA Analyzer coincided with the arrival
of the base station signal’s first pilot PN chip.
When the base station’s signal is delayed relative to the trigger event,
time offset will be a positive value. The second example is a
measurement with a positive time offset. The beginning of the data
block will align with a portion of the reference signal toward the end of
a pilot PN sequence. This indicates that the trigger event to the CDMA
Analyzer occurred when the base station was still transmitting a pilot
PN sequence prior to the first pilot PN chip of the expected sequence.
When the base station’s signal is early relative to the trigger event,
time offset will be a negative value. The third example is a
measurement with a negative time offset. The beginning of the data
block will align with a portion of the reference signal after the first pilot
PN chip. This indicates that the trigger event to the CDMA Analyzer
occurred after arrival of the base station signal’s first pilot PN chip.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
•
•
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
Chapter 5
135
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
F igu r e 5-2
Tim e Offset
Ca r r ier F eed t h r ou gh
Carrier feedthrough is displayed when the Rhomeasurement is
selected. Carrier feedthrough is a common cause of bad rho
measurements. Carrier feedthrough is a result of RF carrier signal
feeding through the I/Q modulator and getting on the output circuitry
without getting modulated. A good carrier feedthrough level is lower
than −25 dB (such as −29 dB).
As shown in the diagram, a perfect constellation is offset by the
magnitude of the carrier feedthrough. In the frequency domain, carrier
feedthrough can show up as an uncorrelated energy spike that can be
seen on the spectrum analyzer by closely scanning the top of the trace.
The effects of carrier feedthrough can also show up as higher noise
levels on the CODE DOM screen. The inactive Walsh codes will be
pushing the −27 dB specification for noise. Carrier feedthrough can be
caused by the lack of isolation across the mixer and cavity of the
transmitter's I/Q modulator. Shielding can help reduce carrier
feedthrough.
136
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
F igu r e 5-3
Ca r r ier F eed t h r ou gh
CarrierFeedthrough
Amplitude
deal
I
I
SignalPower+ErrorPower
origin
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
•
•
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
Chapter 5
137
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
Er r or Vector Ma gn itu d e (EVM) Mea su r em en ts
EVM
EVMis a measurement of the accuracy of the phase and amplitude of the
QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) or Offset QPSK (OQPSK)
modulation. Expressed as a percentage, it is the RMS magnitude value
of the error vector which connects the ideal signal phasor to a measured
signal phasor at the detection decision points.
F igu r e 5-4
Com p on en t s of E r r or Vect or Ma gn it u d e
Q
Magnitude Error
I
evm1.ds4
The magnitude of this error vector represents the “error” between the
ideal signal and the measured signal.
As part of the measurement, the signal is corrected for clock delay,
carrier frequency, carrier phase, and amplitude scaling.
Ma gn it u d e Er r or
Magnitude Erroris the difference in the RMS magnitude value (in
percent) between the ideal signal phasor and the compensated,
measured signal phasor at the detected decision points.
P h a se Er r or
Phase Erroris the RMS value of the difference in phase (degrees)
between the ideal signal phasor and the compensated, measured signal
phasor at the detection decision points.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
•
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
138
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
Cod e Dom a in Mea su r em en ts – IS-95
If you have selected IS-95 only in the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
screen, the Code Domain screen will appear as described in this section,
with the Walsh Code ordering following the Hadamard paradigm, with
64 channels, total. These channels are referred to as “I” channels.
If you wish to make use of the extended Walsh ordering - Bit Reverse -
The following measurements are displayed on the CODE DOM (code
domain analyzer) screen: power, fast power, timing and phase.
Measurements are selected from the Measurementfield on the Main
controls menu.
Time offset (Tm Ofs) and frequency error (Freq Err) are always
displayed when any code domain measurement is made. Carrier
feedthrough (CarFT) is also displayed except when fast power is
measured.
F igu r e 5-5
Cod e Dom a in P ow er
Other users & noise
Synch
Paging
Frequency Domain
Pilot
User #2
User #1
freq
1.2288 MHz
Code Domain
Walsh Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
32
63
User User
User
3
Paging
Pilot
Synch
1
2
Cod e Dom a in P ow er, IS-95
The Test Set provides two code domain power measurements.
•
Absolute code domain power displays the power in each of the 64
Walsh channels, relative to the total power inside a 1.23 MHz
bandwidth centered at the tune frequency. The 64 Walsh channels (0
through 63) are represented by a vertical bar on the analyzer ’s
display. To measure absolute code domain power the Ch pwr unit
the Markercontrols to move the marker to the Walsh channel (Walsh
Chapter 5
139
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
•
Relative code domain power displays the power in each of the 64
Walsh channels, relative to the pilot’s power. (Pilot power is
approximately two-thirds of the total power.) The 64 Walsh codes (0
through 63) are represented by a vertical bar on the analyzer ’s
display. To measure relative code domain power the Ch pwr unit
the Markercontrols to move the marker to the Walsh channel (Walsh
F igu r e 5-6
Select in g Ab solu t e or R ela t ive Cod e Dom a in P ow er, IS-95 on ly
Select
CD Setup.
Select Abs (absolute) or
Rel (relative) code domain
power measurement.
F igu r e 5-7
Rea d in g Cod e Dom a in P ow er, IS-95 on ly
Walsh 0
(Pilot)
Marker
Set to
Marker.
Select the Walsh channel
(moves marker).
Read code
domain power.
The units for absolute power are dBm. The units for relative power are
dB.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-95 only)
140
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
F a st P ow er
Fast power is a faster method of measuring code domain power. A value
for Time Offset must be transferred from a non-fast power
measurement before fast measurements begin, or when changes to any
of the following fields occur: Data Rate, PN Offset, CDMA TB, Synth
Ref.
The number of measurement averages can be entered in the Num Avgs
field on the FP Setup menu. This number is used to calculate and
display successive code domain power measurements.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
Cod e Dom a in Tim in g (Tim in g)
Code domain timing is the difference in time between pilot (Walsh 0)
and other Walsh codes with the same forward CDMA channel. In the
CODE DOM screen, this measurement is indicated as positive or
negative bar with the size of the bar indicating how far ahead or behind
the other Walsh channels are relative to the pilot. Signals above the
reference are leading in time; signals below the reference are lagging.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-95 only)
Cod e Dom a in P h a se (P h se)
Code domain phase is the difference in phase between the pilot and
other code channels (Walsh codes) within the same forward CDMA
channel. It displays the phase error for each of the 64 Walsh channels
relative to the pilot channel (Walsh 0). This measurement is indicated
as positive or negative bars on the Test Set's CODE DOM screen. The
size of the bar indicates how much the phase of other Walsh codes lead
or lag the pilot. Signals above the reference are leading in phase;
signals below the reference are lagging.
Chapter 5
141
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
F igu r e 5-8
Cod e Dom a in Tim in g a n d P h a se
Time
32
WalshCode
WalshCode
8
1
40
9
Phase
9
32
1
8
40
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-95 only)
•
Cod e Dom a in Mea su r em en ts – IS-2000
If you have selected IS-2000 in the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
screen, the Code Domain screen will appear as described in this section,
with a default Walsh Code ordering following the Bit Reverse paradigm,
with 128 channels.
If you wish to make use of the traditional Walsh ordering - Hadamard -
Bit Reverse, or Walsh index ordering display mode for Code Domain
Power is a newly defined order for code domain measurements
supporting IS-2000 CDMA. This coding sequence differs from IS-95’s, or
Ad va n t a ges of Usin g IS-2000
The CDMA standard, IS-2000, offers a number of enhancements to the
IS-95 standard including the following:
•
•
•
Reverse Link Pilot for Each Mobile – Allows base stations to perform
synchronous detection during demodulation, resulting in a
performance gain.
True QSPK Modulation – Yields 2 bits per symbol, allowing twice the
processing gain to be applied to both I and Q data. This, more
efficient modulation also allows for stronger convolutional encoding.
Continuous Reverse Link Waveform – Continuous (no pulse) reverse
link provides less biomedical interference and better transmit power
averaging.
142
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
•
Improved Convolutional Encoding for 14.4 Kbps Voice Channels –
Improved spectral efficiency and higher spreading rates allow voice
channels using the 14.4 Kbps vocoder now have robust convolutional
encoding.
•
•
•
Fast Closed Loop Power Control on Forward Link traffic.
Auxiliary Pilot support for Beam Forming
Forward Link Transmit Diversity - OTD, Multi-Antenna
In t er p r et in g IS-2000 Ch a n n el Or d er in g
The IS-95 standard includes only 64 Walsh codes which map directly
into channels, numbered consecutively from 0 to 63 (Hadamard
ordering). This provided a uniform channel size regardless of purpose.
The IS-2000 standard allows up to 128 Walsh codes. In addition, to
handle the wide range of data rates available in IS-2000 (9.6 kbps for
voice up to 307.2 kbps for low mobility data), variable length Walsh
these codes are generated and how they can be selected to maintain
orthogonality.
F igu r e 5-9
Bu ild in g a t r ee u sin g t h e Bit R ever se m et h od
000
(0)
100
(4)
00
10
0
1
010
110
(2)
(6)
0
(1)
(5)
001
101
01
11
011
111
(3)
(7)
To generate a Walsh code tree, take the initial code, first add a place
(bit) in the most significant number ’s (MSN) place. Then, for the upper
branch, give this bit the value “0”. Finally, for the lower branch give this
number the value “1”. This process proceeds to generate more and more
branches until you have reached the desired Walsh code length. The
code sets are denoted by their length in bits which corresponds to the
vertical columns (all codes that have the same Spread Factor) in the
tree.
The Walsh order (number of bits that comprises the specified code) (see
Figure 5-10) indicates the bit number to use to spread the data. Before
being spread, data is assigned to the Walsh codes encompassed by the
spread. After encoding and interleaving, the data is spread according to
the Walsh order.
Chapter 5
143
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
The order selected depends on the data type. A Walsh order of 1 (one),
will result in a channel size of 128. This size excludes all other channel
numbers from the transmission. However, a Walsh order of 2, on any of
the 4 possible Walsh codes at that level (3, 1, 2 or 0)) reserves all the
channels which can be generated from this channel, using the bit
reverse algorithm, on Walsh orders 2 through 7.
with Walsh order 2. The shaded box indicates all the channels which
will be assigned this code set. The Channel size indicates the number of
Walsh orders implicated in the original Walsh order/Walsh code
selection.
Ava ila b le Mea su r em en t s in t h e Cod e Dom a in
The following measurements may be selected from within the Code
Domain screen:
•
•
•
•
•
Power
Fast Power
Complex Power
Power & Noise
Fast Power Synchronize
Channels are indicated both by the selected number (0-127) as well as
by the Walsh order to which they have been assigned or the channel
size, depending on your selection.
The Code Domain may be viewed either in the Bit Reverse ordering as
F igu r e 5-11
Cod e Dom a in P ow er, Bit R ever se Or d er in g
Chapter 5
145
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
F igu r e 5-12
Cod e Dom a in P ow er, IS-2000, H a d a m a r d Or d er in g
Time offset (Tm Ofs) and frequency error (Freq Err) are always
displayed when any code domain measurement is made. Carrier
feedthrough (CarFT) is also displayed except when fast power is
measured.
Cod e Dom a in P ow er, IS-2000
The code domain power displays the power in each of the 128 Walsh
channels, relative to the total power inside a 1.23 MHz bandwidth
centered at the tune frequency. The 128 Walsh channels (0 through 127)
are represented by a vertical bar on the analyzer ’s display. Use the
Markercontrols to move the marker to the channel you want to
measure. Reading the Code Domain Power in IS-2000 mode is slightly
important parameters. Note that Chan Num is now comprised of two
F igu r e 5-13
Rea d in g Cod e Dom a in P ow er, IS-2000
Supplemental
Channel
Walsh 0
(Pilot)
Walsh
Channel
Marker
Number of
Channels
that
comprise
the Supplemental
Channel
Select the Marker
Read code domain
Set to Marker
position
power
146
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000)
•
F a st P ow er
Fast power is a faster method of measuring code domain power. A
number of internal values must be transferred from a non-fast power
measurement before fast measurements begin, or when changes to any
of the following fields occur: Data Rate, PN Offset, CDMA TB, Synth
Ref.
The Fast Power Synchronize measurement is designed to set these
internal variables.
The number of measurement averages can be entered in the Num Avgs
field on the FP Setup menu. This number is used to calculate and
display successive code domain power measurements.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
Cod e Dom a in P ow er & Noise
The Power & Noise option displays the Code Domain channels along
with channel noise, shown as hatch marks within each channel area.
Noise and power are combined in supplemental channels to take into
account the relationship between channel width and noise power. For
example, a supplemental channel with a width of 2, in which each
individual channel has a noise power value of -15 dBm, will have a
combined noise power value of -12 dBm, or an increase of roughly 3 dB.
F igu r e 5-14
Cod e Dom a in P ow er & Noise
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
Chapter 5
147
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
Cod e Dom a in Com p lex P ow er
The Complex Power measurements provides two views of the current
Power values in the code domain:
•
•
I Code View – IS-95 channels and IS-2000 channels combined
Q Code View – IS-2000 channels only
F igu r e 5-15
Cod e Dom a in Com p lex P ow er
I Code shows combined IS-95 and IS-2000
I Code
Q Code
Channel 0 is active in I Code, inactive in Q code. Means IS-95 only.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
Cod e Dom a in F a st P ow er Syn ch r on ize
The Fast Power Synchronize measurement is designed to make a Power
measurement and ensure that all the internal values are set properly
for a Fast Power measurement. It will have the same look and feel as a
page 147).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
•
Code Dom (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000)
148
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
CDMA Measurements
IQ Con stella tion Dia gr a m , IS-2000 on ly
If you have the IS-2000 option installed, you will be able to select the
I/Q PLOT screen from the set of available measurements.
F igu r e 5-16
IQ Con st ella t ion Dia gr a m
The I/Q Constellation Diagram screen graphically shows I/Q decision
points. This is a useful troubleshooting tool when investigating Rho
problems
errors. However, the 4 point groupings could be skewed away from
perfect square or offset indicating a phase error. This will result in
interference from I to Q and from Q to I. Phase errors can result from
crosstalk between I and Q in the base station baseband processing
section, misaligned LOs or intermodulation between Walsh codes.
P N Offset Sea r ch
There are two ways to provide your Base Station’s PN Offset value to
the Test Set:
•
•
Have the Test Set determine the value from the received signals. See
Chapter 5
149
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Con tr ol F ield s for CDMA Mea su r em en ts
# of F r a m es
ACP Ca l
This field calibrates the ACP measurement for the current RF analyzer
frequency at the selected frequency offset (ACP Offset) and filter
bandwidth (ACP Fltr BW).
This field is displayed only when the ACP measurement is selected.
NOTE
You must always remove power at the ANT IN or RF IN/OUT connector
before calibrating adjacent channel power to ensure accurate
calibration.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The Test Set can memorize approximately 16 sets of ACP calibration
data. If calibration data does not exist for a given channel and offset
setting, the following message will be displayed:
ACP UNCAL: No Freq or ACP Offset cal. Start ACP Cal.
To clear this message, select the ACP Calfield to start the calibration.
When the calibration is finished, the message will be gone.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
ACP F ltr BW
This field designates the filter bandwidth around the adjacent channels
at which the measurements are made. Valid values are 10 kHz to 1.23
MHz with 100 Hz resolution.
This field is displayed only when the ACP measurement is selected.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Power is only measured with bandwidths up to 100 kHz. If a wider
bandwidth is specified, the power in the first 100 kHz is measured and
used to calculate the power in the total specified bandwidth.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
150
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
ACP Offset
This field designates the frequency offset from the center frequency at
which the ACP measurement is made in the adjacent channels. Valid
values are 100 kHz to 3 MHz.
This field is displayed only when the ACP measurement is selected.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
ADCfs or ADC F S
ADCfs indicates how close the measured power level is to the maximum
allowed input level for the analyzer ’s Analog-to-Digital Converter
(ADC). This level is affected by the Gainsetting on the CODE DOM
screen, the Input Atten, Gain, and, Pwr Gainsettings on the CDMA
ANALYZER screen, and the RF level of the signal connected to the Test
Set.
For best measurement performance, ADCfs should be between -1.0 and
-10 dB. The measurement will be aborted if ADCfs goes above 0.5 dB.
Measurement accuracy may be degraded if ADCfs goes below -10 dB.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyze screen: gain controls menu)
CDMA ANALYZER (ADC FS)
CDMA GENERATOR (ADC FS)
Am p lit u d e
This field sets the output level of the RF generator to the RF IN/OUT or
DUPLEX OUT port. Use the DUPLEX OUT port for signal levels
greater than -26 dBm.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA GENERATOR
Chapter 5
151
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
An a lyzer (CDMA a n a lyzer )
The Analyzerfield controls three functions:
• Arm Measarms the CDMA analyzer. The CDMA analyzer needs to
be armed only when Single(see below) is selected.
• Single/Contselects between “single” measurements and
“continuous” measurements.
— When Singleis chosen, you must arm each measurement by
selecting the Arm Measfield (see above).
— When Cont(continuous) is chosen, measurements are
automatically armed.
The default selection is Cont.
• Disarmdisarms the CDMA analyzer during single operation. To stop
continuous measurements, select Single. Selecting Disarmdoes not
prevent the analyzer from being re-armed during continuous
measurements
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
An a lyzer (cod e d om a in a n a lyzer )
This field is used to arm or disarm measurements when making a
single measurement (does not affect continuous measurements).
Selecting Disarmstops the analyzer during a single measurement.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu
An l Dir
This field is used to select the type of signal (forward or reverse link) to
analyze.
• Fwdsets the analyzer to look for base station transmitter data
(forward link).
• Revsets the analyzer to look for mobile transmitter data (reverse
link).
Default selection: Fwd
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
152
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
An l Sp ecia l
Analyzer special modes change how IQ modulated signals are analyzed.
• Normalsets the CDMA generator and CDMA analyzer to create and
analyze signals with standard rotation.
• Invertedsets reverse rotation for I and Q signals; opposite to the
direction specified in the IS-95 standards. In this mode, the CDMA
generator creates reverse-rotation IQ signals and the CDMA
analyzer expects reverse-rotation IQ signals.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
Au to Zer o
This field is displayed for average power measurements.
Autois used to automatically zero the average power measurement
periodically during operation.
Manualis used to override the Autofeature. When Manualis selected,
you must manually zero the average power measurement by selecting
the Pwr Zerofield.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
Ca r r ier FT or Ca r r ier F eed th r u
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
Ch a n Nu m
IS-2000 only. Indicates the supplemental channel and Walsh channel or
code (in parenthesis), at which the marker is currently located. The
field will change when you change the value of the marker position
using the numeric keypad or the knob in Marker control mode with
Marker Pos is selected.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only)
Chapter 5
153
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Ch a n Size
This field appears only in IS-2000 Code Domain measurements. The
size reflects its location in the Walsh set, with 1 indicating that there is
only one channel included. By comparison, a channel size of 32, will
encompass (and therefore make unavailable) a total of 32, channels.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only)
CD p w r u n it
This field allows you to select absolute or relative power measurements
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
Ch n P w r Ca l
This field is displayed when the channel power measurements are
selected. It is used to calibrate the channel power measurement. When
this field is selected, an internally generated calibration signal is
measured using the average power technique. Channel power is also
measured and a correction factor is generated. This correction factor is
applied to subsequent channel power measurements.
Calibration should be performed whenever a new set of measurements
is made and whenever the frequency of the measured signal is changed.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-95 option): CD Setup Control
menu, Absselected for CD pwr unit.
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 option): Reference
Control menu, Absselected for CD pwr unit.
154
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Con tr ols
Code domain analyzer settings are arranged into several menus that
are accessed using the Controlsfield. The control groups are:
• Mainaccesses the RF In/Ant, Tune Freq (or RF Channel),
Measurement, and Analyzerfields.
• Markercontrols the marker to look at the level of individual Walsh
channels.
• Triggeraccesses the trigger controls: Qual Eventand Trig Event.
• Auxaccesses the Thresholdand Meas Intvlfields. In IS-2000
mode, Auxalso accesses Meas Order.
• Gainlets you alter the gain Gaininto the CDMA analyzer while
reading the ADCfsvalue. The attenuation can also be changed Input
Atten
• PN Setupaccesses the PN Offset, PN Incrment, and Find PNfields.
• Reference, only in IS-2000 mode, accesses the CD pwr unitand
Chn Pwr Calfields. CD pwr unit allows you to specify either
absolute or relative values for power measurements.
• FP Setupaccesses the offset transfer and number of averages fields
used to make fast powermeasurements.
• CD Setup, in IS-95 only, accesses the CD pwr unit, Chn Pwr Cal,
and ChPwrfields. CD pwr unitallows you to choose either relative or
absolute power measurements.
Many of these controls are duplicates of those found on the CDMA
ANALYZER and CDMA GENERATOR screens.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): all menus
CW RF P a th
This field selects the path for the RF generator ’s signal.
• Bypassdisables the IQ modulator. This mode is used when
generating standard AM, FM, or CW signals in the Test Set.
• IQenables the IQ modulator.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA GENERATOR
Chapter 5
155
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Da ta R a te
This field allows receiver testing at data rates of 9.6 or 14.4 Kbps.
If the data buffer is the selected data source, and the data rate is
changed, the transmission state will change to Idle. Select Sendto
resume data output at the new rate.
Choices
•
•
14.4 Kbps
9.6 Kbps
Default selection: 9.6 Kbps
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA GENERATOR
156
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Da ta Sou r ce
This field selects where the baseband quadrature spreader gets its
data. This field is removed when the Gen Modefield is set to Noise.
• Zeroesuses a data stream of all 0’s that is not encoded before being
applied to the baseband quadrature spreader and output.
• Extuses external data from the DATA IN connector. This data is not
encoded before being applied to the baseband quadrature spreader.
• Randomuses 300 frames of random, error-free data. (See Data Buff
(below) for Single/Cont, Idle/Sendoperation.)
• Data Buffuses data previously loaded into the data buffer.You can
load your own data into the buffer over GPIB. This data is encoded
before baseband quadrature spreading. Choosing this selection
displays these additional fields:
— Single/Cont
— Singlecauses the data stream to be output once when Sendis
selected.
— Contcauses the data stream to be repeated continuously when
Sendis selected. Changing to single operation while sending
causes the data to be interrupted after the current 20 ms
frame.
— Idle/Send
— Idleindicates that data from the buffer is not being
transmitted. Selecting Idlewhile sending data interrupts the
data at the completion of the current 20 ms frame. A data
stream of all zeroes (encoded) continues to be transmitted after
the initial data stream is interrupted. This is different from
the Zeroesselection above where the data is not encoded.
— Sendcauses the data stream to be output after two rising
edges of the internal 80 ms clock are detected.
— Start Framespecifies the first frame of data to send.
— # of Framesspecifies how many frames of data to send.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA GENERATOR
Chapter 5
157
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Even Sec In
This field controls the internal connection of the EVEN SECOND
SYNC IN connector to the CDMA analyzer or generator.
•
When Enableis selected, signals applied to the EVEN SECOND
SYNC IN connector synchronize the timing circuits.
•
When Not is selected, input signals applied to the EVEN SECOND
SYNC IN are ignored. This mode may be useful when signals other
than an even-second clock are used for synchronization. For
example, when using a one-second clock, you would select Notafter
synchronization to prevent the internal even-second clock from being
retriggered half-way through its cycle.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
F in d P N
This field selects whether the PN offset will be automatically calculated
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
F r eq E r r
This measurement display field displays the frequency error. See
this measurement.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer)
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
158
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Ga in
This field sets the IF gain of the CDMA analyzer for rho, EVM, and
channel power measurements. (Range: 0 dB to 36 dB in 6 dB steps.)
Gain is adjusted two ways:
• Automeasures the signal level and automatically adjusts the gain.
• Holddisables automatic operation to allow you to manually enter
the desired gain by selecting the current gain setting and entering a
new value using the keypad or cursor control knob.
This field is replaced by the Pwr Gainfield when measuring average
for more information.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): gain controls menu
Gen Dir
This field sets the link direction of the CDMA signal.
• Fwd(forward) sets the CDMA generator to produce QPSK
modulation to imitate a base station. The EQ filter field is
automatically displayed and set to EQ Into apply an equalizing
filter to the I and Q paths as part of the baseband filtering, but it can
be changed to Out.
• Rev(reverse) sets the CDMA generator to produce OQPSK
modulation to imitate a mobile station. The EQ filter field is not
displayed because it is automatically set to Out(and cannot be
changed). It is set to Outto remove the equalizing filter from the I
and Q paths.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA GENERATOR
Chapter 5
159
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Gen Mod e
This field selects the type of modulation information sent to the CDMA
generator ’s IQ modulator.
• Dataallows data to be transmitted to simulate a traffic channel with
• Eb/Nocauses a combination of data and White Gaussian Noise
(AWGN) noise to be transmitted. The value entered is the ratio
between the energy of each information bit (E ) and the noise
b
spectral density (N ), expressed in dB.
o
• Noisecauses a signal modulated by White Gaussian Noise to be
generated. The noise is band limited to 2 MHz and white inside a
1.25 MHz bandwidth centered around the RF Gen Freq. This
selection removes the Data Source, Start Frame, and # of Frames
fields from the screen; those fields are only used with the Dataand
Eb/Noentries.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA GENERATOR
Gen Sp ecia l
Generator special modes change how IQ modulated signals are
generated.
• Normalsets the CDMA generator and CDMA analyzer to create and
analyze signals with standard rotation.
• Invertedsets reverse rotation for I and Q signals; opposite to the
direction specified in the IS-95 standards. In this mode, the CDMA
generator creates reverse-rotation IQ signals and the CDMA
analyzer expects reverse-rotation IQ signals.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA GENERATOR
160
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
In p u t Atten
This field controls the RF attenuators of the Test Set. If an ADC
Overdrivenmessage is displayed at the top of the screen while making
measurements, increase the attenuator setting until the message is no
longer displayed. This is the coarse level adjustment for the signal level
into the CDMA analyzer. Fine level adjustment is performed using the
Gainfield.
NOTE
The Input Attensetting does not affect, and is not displayed with, the
average power measurement.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): gain controls menu
In p u t P or t
This field selects which Test Set port to use as the RF input. This field
is not displayed when measuring average power, since you must use the
RF IN/OUT port to measure average power.
CAUTION
Instrument Damage
To prevent instrument damage, do not exceed the maximum power level
labeled at the connectors on your Test Set. The ANT IN connector is for
measuring low level RF signals. High level (>60 mW) transmitter
signals must be measured using the RF IN/OUT port.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu
Lvl
This measurement displays the relative level of the selected Walsh
channel when compared to the total power in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth
centered around the Tune Freqsetting. The measurement is displayed
when the code domain analyzer’s maincontrols Measurementfield
is set to Poweror Fast Pwr. This function is appears as Marker Lvlfor
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-95 only): Marker controls menu
Chapter 5
161
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
I P ow er Level
This IS-2000 Code Domain display field shows the power of the
currently selected I (in the top bar graph) Walsh code.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only): Complex Power
measurement.
Ma r k er Lvl
This display field shows the level of the channel or Walsh order at the
current marker location (IS-2000 only) relative to the 0 dB reference
level shown in Pwr Refin the Marker control view. The location of the
top of the channel relative to the reference level is determined by the
Pwr Scalesetting, also in the Marker control view.
The value for the power is calculated by averaging the total power over
a 1.23 MHz bandwidth centered around the Tune Freqsetting.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only)
Ma r k er P os
This Code Domain field sets the index (starting at the left side of the
bar graph) for the current marker location (IS-2000 only).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only): Marker Controls
menu.
Mea s In tvl or Mea s In t
This field determines the length of the data block. The data block is a
time record over which correlated measurements are computed. As the
interval is increased, measurement time is increased. Increasing the
interval gives more accurate measurement results, particularly with
frequency error and phase error measurements.
This field is displayed on the CDMA ANALYZER screen when a rho or
EVM measurement is selected. It is also displayed on the CODE DOM
(Code Domain Analyzer) controls menu.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): auxiliary controls menu
162
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Mea s Or d er
This field is displayed in the Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000. The
Measurement Order is the way in which the Walsh channels are shown
on the screen. Select Bit Reversedto show channels grouped
according to their Walsh order. Select Hadamardto show channels
grouped by channel number, as in the IS-95 standard.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only): auxiliary controls
menu
Mea su r em en t
This field controls the type of code domain measurement to make. In
IS-95 only mode, this includes power, fast power, timing, or phase. In
IS-2000 mode, this includes power, fast power, power and noise,
complex power, and fast power synchronization.
It also controls the measurement mode (single or continuous):
• Singleis used when you want to make one measurement.You must
select the Arm Measfunction of the Analyzerfield before a
measurement can be made.
• Contis used to continuously make measurements. Measurements
are automatically re-armed after each measurement.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu
Nu m Avgs
The number of averages determines how many measurements are
averaged when measuring fast power. Averaging reduces measurement
speed.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): fast power setup controls menu
Chapter 5
163
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Ofs Tr n sfer
IS-95 only. This field transfers the time offset value from the time offset
measurement (displayed in TmOfs) to the Time Offsetfield
automatically. Before selecting Ofs Trnsfer, you must make at least
one of the following code domain measurements:
•
•
•
Power
Timing
Phase
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When using this command programmatically, be sure a value for Tm
Ofshas been obtained from a power, timing, or phase measurement.
(One method of ensuring the measurement has been completed would
be to send an GPIB command to query the results of the Tm Ofsfield
before sending the transfer command).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): FP setup controls menu
Ou tp u t P or t
This field selects the output port for the signal from the Test Set’s RF
and CDMA generators.
RF Outselects the RF IN/OUT connector.
Duplselects the DUPLEX OUT connector.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA GENERATOR
P h a se/d iv
This field sets the display resolution for the code domain phase
measurement: 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, or 50 milliradians (mrad). This field is
displayed on the CODE DOM screen’s Markermenu when the
Measurementfield is set to Phase.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-95 only): marker controls
menu
164
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
P h se
This field displays the results of the code domain phase measurement.
This field is displayed on the CODE DOM screen when the
Measurementfield is set to Phase.
For more information about the code domain phase measurement see
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-95 only)
P N In cr m en t
This value is used to calculate the PN offset for the system. This field is
displayed for EVM or Rho measurements when the Find PNfield is set
to Auto.
If you know the PN increment for the system you are testing, you can
enter it in this field (this speeds the PN offset calculation). Enter 1in
this field if the PN increment is unknown.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): PN setup controls menu
P N Offset
This field is displayed for EVM or Rho measurements when the
Find PNfield is set to Manual.
Use this field to enter the PN sequence offset index for your base
station. Each whole offset is equal to 64 chips (= 52.08 µs). Fractional
values are rounded off, and can be entered, in increments of 0.015625
(1 chip). Once entered, this value is shared by all CDMA screens.
This value is used by the analyzer when the Even Sec Infield on the
CDMA GENERATOR screen is set to Enable.
If the PN offset is unknown, the Test Set can calculate the PN offset
NOTE
When the Even Sec Infield is set to Not, changes to the PN Offset
field have no effect on the analyzer.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): PN setup controls menu
Chapter 5
165
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
P N Offset or P N Ofs
This measurement display field (PN Offset) is displayed on the CDMA
ANALYZER and CDMA GENERATOR screens when Rho
measurements are selected. If the PN Offset measurement is not
displayed, select the Freq Err measurement field, the choose PN Offset.
The same measurement is displayed in the PN Ofsmeasurement field
on the CODE DOM screen.
NOTE
When the Even Sec Infield is set to Not, changes to the PN Offset
field have no effect on the analyzer.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): PN setup controls menu
P w r Ga in
This field is used to set the level into the CDMA analyzer when making
average power measurements. Levels are set in 6 dB increments. The
IF signal level is displayed as ADC FSwhen average power is measured,
and should be between -1.0 and- 5 dB for best measurement results.
• Autoautomatically sets the gain for an ADC FS value in the range of
−1 to −5 dB. This is the recommended mode of operation.
• Holdlets you override the automatic setting to manually set the
gain.
This field is only displayed when an average power measurement is
selected.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
166
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
P w r In tvl
This field determines the length of the data block when measuring
average power. The data block is a time record over which correlated
measurements are computed.
Range: 0.25 to 15.0 ms
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
P w r R ef
This Code Domain field determines the reference level from which the
power reading is taken. This value is always 0 dB.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000): marker controls menu
P w r Sca le – IS-95
The upper subfield is used to select the reference level for power
measurements (relative to the total power of the entire CDMA
channel). The reference is the top line of the screen and defaults to
0 dB.
The lower subfield is used to select the display resolution for the power
measurement; 1, 2 or 5 dB per vertical division.
The power scale fields are displayed in the Markermenu when the Main
controls Measurementfield is set to Poweror Fast Pwr.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): marker controls menu
P w r Sca le – IS-2000
This Code Domain field (IS-2000) is used to select the display resolution
for the power measurement: 1, 2 or 5 dB per vertical division
The power scale field is displayed in the Markermenu when the Main
controls Measurementfield is set to Power, Fast Pwr,
Power & Noise, Complex Poweror FstPwr Sync..
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only): marker controls
menu
Chapter 5
167
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
P w r Zer o
Selecting this field calibrates (zeroes) the average power meter. This
operation should be performed immediately before making an average
power measurement. This field is only displayed if the average power
measurement is selected.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The Auto Zerofield causes average power to be periodically calibrated
when set to Auto. If the Auto Zerofield is set to Manual, you must use
for more information.)
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
Q P ow er Level
This IS-2000 Code Domain display field shows the power (in the lower
bar graph) of the currently selected Q (IS-2000) Walsh code.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only): Complex Power
measurement.
Qu a l Even t
This field selects a trigger qualifier. The trigger qualifier serves as a
precursor to the analyzer ’s trigger event. Selecting a trigger qualifier is
required when a time-delayed trigger event is desired, or if the trigger
signal is externally supplied at the TRIGGER QUALIFIER IN
connector.
qualifier starts the delay timer. When the timer expires, a trigger event
occurs and a measurement is made.
• Nonecauses the trigger event to be determined solely by the
selection in the Trig Eventfield.
• 27 msis an internally generated clock signal.
• 20 msis an internally generated clock signal.
• 80 msis an internally generated clock signal (default selection).
• 2 sis an internally generated clock signal.
• Ampl Loqualifies a trigger each time the input to the CDMA
analyzer rises above −18 dB ADC FS. ADC FSis displayed when the
average power measurement is selected, or when adjusting the Gain
168
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
field on the CODE DOMAIN ANALYZER screen.
• Ampl Midqualifies a trigger each time the input to the CDMA
analyzer rises above −12 ADC FS.
• Ampl Hiqualifies a trigger each time the input to the CDMA
analyzer rises above − 6 ADC FS.
• Externalmust be selected if the trigger qualifier is provided by an
external source. The external signal connects to the TRIGGER
QUALIFIER IN connector. A qualifier occurs on the input signal’s
rising edge.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): trigger controls menu
Ra te R C-3
This field appears only in IS-2000 Code Domain measurements. The
field displays the data rate of the currently selected channel in terms of
an RC3 radio configuration.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only)
Ra te R C-4
This field appears only in IS-2000 Code Domain measurements. The
field displays the data rate of the currently selected channel in terms of
an RC4 radio configuration.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only)
Ra te R C-5
This field appears only in IS-2000 Code Domain measurements. The
field displays the data rate of the currently selected channel in terms of
an RC5 radio configuration.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only)
Chapter 5
169
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
RF Ch a n n el
The RF Channel field is displayed when the RF Displayfield on the
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to Chan.
This field displays the current channel number. Channel tuning
eliminates the need to enter transmit and receive frequencies directly
into the Test Set. Once the radio’s RF channel standard is selected, you
only have to enter the channel number to automatically set the RF
Generatorand RF Analyzerto the correct frequency.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
To utilize the correct transmit and receive frequencies select the
appropriate channel standard from the RF Chan Stdfield on the
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
CDMA ANALYZER
CDMA GENERATOR
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu
RF Gen F r eq
This field specifies the center frequency of the generated CDMA signal.
This field is displayed only when the RF Displayfield on the
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to Freq.
NOTE
Channel Tuning
You can configure the Test Set to allow direct entry of channel numbers
(instead of entering the frequency) by using the RF Displayfield on the
for more information.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA GENERATOR
RF In /An t
This field selects the Test Set’s RF input.
CAUTION
The maximum safe level into the ANT IN connector is 6 0mW.
Exceeding this level could cause permanent damage to the Test Set.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu
170
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Sp r d F a ct (Sp r ea d F a ctor )
This selectable IS-2000 Code Domain field shows the spread factor
(Walsh set) of the currently selected channel. The spread factor
represents the number of Walsh channels available if all channels use
this spread factor. A spread factor of 128 corresponds to a Walsh order
of 7 and a channel width of 1 (out of 128). A spread factor of 8
corresponds to a Walsh order 3 and a channel size of 16. The spread
factor is inversely proportional to the number of channels being used to
generate a signal: The lower the spread factor the greater the number
of channels being used to generate the signal. A lower spread factor,
while using up bandwidth can accommodate a large amount of data,
resulting in a higher data rate.
Lower spread factors are usually reserved for data transmission while
higher spread factors are used for voice transmission.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000)
Sta r t F r a m e
Th r esh old
For Code Domain measurements. Enter the measurement display
threshold for making code domain measurements. Walsh channels that
have power levels below the threshold value are not displayed as active
channels.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Querying Phase and Timing measurements for Walsh channels that are
below the threshold level using GPIB will return a default value of
9e99.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): auxiliary controls menu
Chapter 5
171
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Tim e
For IS-95 Code Domain measurements only. This field displays the
results of the code domain timing measurement. This field is displayed
on the CODE DOM screen menu when the Measurementfield is set to
Timing.
For more information about the code domain timing measurement see
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-95 only).
Tim e/d iv
For IS-95 Code Domain measurements only. This field sets the display
resolution for the code domain timing measurement: 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, or
50 nanoseconds (ns). This field is displayed on the CODE DOM screen’s
Markermenu when the Measurementfield is set to Timing.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-95 only): marker controls
menu
172
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Tim e Offset
This field allows you to manually enter a time offset.To obtain a value
to enter in this field you must make at least one of the following
measurements.
•
•
•
•
Power
Timing
Phase
Rho
After making the measurement, access the FP Setupmenu on the
CODE DOM screen, and enter the value obtained from the Time Ofs
field or, for rho measurements, the Time Offsetmeasurement field on
the CDMA ANALYZER screen.
An entry into the Time Offsetfield can also be made automatically,
When measuring fast power, the code domain analyzer uses the value
in the Time Offsetfield instead of re-measuring the time offset
parameters each time a code domain measurement is made.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-95 only): FP setup controls
menu
Tim e Ofs
This measurement field displays the time offset when a rho
information about this measurement.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer).
Chapter 5
173
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Tr ig Even t
This field determines when the trigger event to the analyzer occurs.
When the selected trigger in this field is qualified by the selection in the
Qual Eventfield, the analyzer is triggered.
Choices
• 27 msis an internally generated clock.
• 20 msis an internally generated clock.
• 80 msis an internally generated clock.
• 2 sis an internally generated clock.
• Delaycontrols a trigger delay timer, beginning from the positive
edge of the selected qualifier. A delay of 20 µs to 10 s is valid.
Initially, the time delay will be 100 µs.
• Immedtriggers immediately after receiving the Qual Eventsignal.
Default selection: Immed.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): trigger controls menu
Tu n e F r eq
Use this field to enter the center frequency of the CDMA channel you
are analyzing. This field is displayed only when the RF Displayfield on
the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to Freq.
NOTE
Channel tuning
You can configure the Test Set to allow direct entry of channel numbers
(instead of entering the frequency) by using the RF Displayfield on the
for more information.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CDMA ANALYZER
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer): main controls menu
174
Chapter 5
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\CdmascrnE2.fm
CDMA Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for CDMA Measurements
Wa lsh Ch a n
This field selects the Walsh channel to which to move the marker (IS-95
only mode). The marker can be moved by either entering the Walsh
channel number using the keypad, or by using the cursor-control knob.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
COD DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-95 only): marker controls menu
Wa lsh Or d er
This selectable IS-2000 Code Domain display field shows the Walsh
order of the currently selected channel. The Walsh order represents the
number of bits used to specify a selected channel (which also
determines channel size). Walsh order 7 (the highest order), will
generate a set of 128 distinct values, or channels of size 1. Walsh order
3, comprised of code values of 3 bits each, will generate 8 distinct values
of channel size 16. The Walsh order (or channel size) indicates how
many channels are used to generate the signal. The lower the Wash
order, the larger number of channels are used to generate the signal. A
lower Walsh order, while using up bandwidth, can accommodate a
larger amount of data, resulting in a higher data rate.
Lower Walsh orders are usually reserved for data transmission, while
higher Walsh orders are used for voice transmissions.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
CODE DOM (Code Domain Analyzer, IS-2000 only): Complex Power
measurement.
Chapter 5
175
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
178
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Analog Measurements
An a log Mea su r em en ts
AC Con tr ol
The type of measurement shown is dependent on the AF Anl In
settings. AC Levelis displayed when the AF Anl Infield is set to SSB
Demod, Audio In, Ext Mod, or Audio Out.
The AC Levelmeasurement field displays either rms potential
(voltage) or audio power (Watts or dBm).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
RF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
AM Dep th Mea su r em en t
This measurement field displays the percent depth of modulation of the
AM signal. This measurement is displayed when the AF Anl Infield is
set to AM MODor AM DEMOD.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
RF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
Chapter 6
179
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Analog Measurements
AF F r eq Mea su r em en t
The AF frequency measurement is the audio frequency of the signal
present at the input selected in the AF Anl Infield (on the AF
ANALYZER screen). Four dashes (- - - -) indicate that no audio
frequency is present to measure.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
RF ANALYZER
DC Level Mea su r em en t
This measurement field displays the dc voltage entering at the source
set in the AF Anl Infield (on the AF ANALYZER screen).
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When the AF Anl Infield is set to FM Demodor AM Demod, the
unit-of-measure is kHz (for FM Demod) or % (for AM Demod). For these
two settings this measurement indicates the dc modulation component
of the received signal.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
RF ANALYZER
180
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Analog Measurements
Distn (Distor tion ) Mea su r em en t
This measurement field displays the percent of distortion for an audio
signal tone.
more information.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Set the Notch Freqfield (on the AF ANALYZER screen) to match the
AF frequency used for your distortion measurement.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALZYER
RF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
F M Devia tion Mea su r em en t
This measurement field displays the deviation of FM signals. This
measurement is displayed when the AF Anl Infield (on the AF
ANALYZER screen) is set to FM Demodor FM Mod.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALZYER
RF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
Chapter 6
181
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Analog Measurements
F r equ en cy Mea su r em en t
This measurement field displays the center frequency the signal being
measured.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
This measurement cannot be used for measuring CDMA signals; use
the CDMA analyzer.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALZYER
RF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
F r equ en cy Er r or Mea su r em en t
This measurement field displays the difference between the Test Set’s
RF channel or tune frequency setting set and measured signal’s
frequency.
You can display the frequency error in ppm by pressing the ppm W key.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
This measurement cannot be used for measuring CDMA signals; use
the CDMA analyzer.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALZYER
RF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
182
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Analog Measurements
TX P ow er Mea su r em en t
Transmitter power measures RF power at the RF IN/OUT port.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Only the RF IN/OUT port can be used for measuring TX power. When
the Input Portis set to Ant, four dashes (- - - -) appear in place of digits
for this measurement.
Use the spectrum analyzer to measure low-level RF power (≤ 60 mW) at
the ANT IN port.
information.
CAUTION
Connecting a signal of >60 mW to the ANT IN port can cause
instrument damage (although internal protection circuits can typically
withstand a short-duration signal of several Watts). If the overpower
circuit is triggered (signified by a warning message at the top of the
screen), remove the signal from the ANT IN port, and reset using Meas
Reset (press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key) or turn the
Test Set off and on to reset it.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
RF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
F M Devia tion Mea su r em en t
This is the default setting for this measurement field. The FM deviation
measurement is the frequency deviation of the carrier. This
measurement field is only displayed when the AF Anl Infield (on the
AF ANALYZER screen) is set to FM Demodor FM Mod.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
RF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
Chapter 6
183
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Analog Measurements
SINAD Mea su r em en t
SINAD is the measure of the ratio of the signal+noise+distortion to the
noise+distortion produced at the output of a receiver that is the result
of a modulated signal input. This ratio is expressed in dB.
more information.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
RF ANALYZER
SNR Mea su r em en t
The is signal to noise ratio of the audio input signal.
more information.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
•
•
Selecting SNRturns off any other audio measurements.
The RF generator and audio frequency generator 1 (AFGen1) must be
set up to provide the radio’s carrier. (AFGen1is automatically turned
on and off repeatedly during this measurement.)
•
•
The AFGen2 Tofield on the RF GENERATOR screen must be set to
Off.
The audio output of the radio’s receiver must be connected to the
AUDIO IN port (set the AF Anl Infield on the AF ANALYZER
screen to Audio In).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is m ea su r em en t is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
RF GENERATOR
RF ANALYZER
184
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Con tr ol F ield s for An a log Mea su r em en ts
#P ts
This field sets the number of points to define or edit on the spectrum
analyzer ’s mask. You can define up to 15 points on the mask.
information about the spectrum analyzer mask.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The starting point of the mask is always the left graticule on the
display, and the end point is always the right graticule on the display.
To define a straight-line mask, set the number of points to 1. The
default mask is a straight line at the top of the display.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: mask controls menu
AF An l In
The audio frequency analyzer input selects the input for the analyzer.
When selected, this field displays a list of choices.
Signals can be analyzed from three different types of inputs:
•
•
The output of the AM, FM, or SSB demodulators.
The AUDIO IN, ANALOG MODULATION IN, and AUDIO OUT
connectors.
•
The signal present at the AM or FM modulators for the RF
generator.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Changing this field changes the audio measurement (in the upper-right
of the screen) to correspond to the selected signal.
information.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
SIGNALING DECODER (All Modes)
Chapter 6
185
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
AF Cn t Ga te
Audio frequency counter gate specifies how long the AF counter
samples the signal before displaying the frequency. Specifying a shorter
gate time may enable you to see frequency fluctuations that might not
be seen using a longer gate time.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
AF Gen 1 F r eq
This field sets the frequency for the first audio frequency sinewave
generator.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF GENERATOR
186
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
AF Gen 1 To
This field has two subfields:
•
The upper field sets the destination port for audio frequency
generator 1
• FM-RF generator FM modulator
• AM-RF generator AM modulator
• Audio Out-AUDIO OUT connector
The lower field
•
•
•
•
sets FM modulation deviation if the upper field set to FM
sets AM modulation depth if the upper field set to AM
sets the amplitude of audio signal (volts RMS) at the AUDIO
OUT connector if upper field is set to Audio Out
•
turns off the AF generator if the Yes On/Off key is pressed.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Simultaneous FM and AM, using both AF generators is not allowed.
AF generators 1 and 2 are automatically turned off any time the CDMA
screens are displayed. This prevents accidental amplitude or frequency
modulation of the CDMA carrier. The AF generators are turned back on
when you exit the CDMA screens (if they were previously turned on).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF GENERATOR
AF Gen 2 F r eq
This field sets the frequency for the second audio frequency sinewave
generator.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF GENERATOR
Chapter 6
187
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
AF Gen 2 To
This field has two subfields:
•
The upper field sets the destination port for audio frequency
generator 2
• FM-RF generator FM modulator
• AM-RF generator AM modulator
• Audio Out-AUDIO OUT connector
The lower field
•
•
•
•
sets FM modulation deviation if the upper field set to FM
sets AM modulation depth if the upper field set to AM
sets the amplitude of audio signal (volts RMS) at the AUDIO
OUT connector if upper field is set to Audio Out
•
turns off the AF generator if the Yes On/Off key is pressed.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Simultaneous FM and AM, using both AF generators is not allowed.
AF generators 1 and 2 are automatically turned off any time the CDMA
screens are displayed. This prevents accidental amplitude or frequency
modulation of the CDMA carrier. The AF generators are turned back on
when you exit the CDMA screens (if they were previously turned on).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF GENERATOR
SIGNALING ENCODER (All Modes)
188
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Am p lit u d e
This field adjusts the amplitude of the RF generator.
See for Atten Hold (below) for more information.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF GENERATOR
SPEC ANL: RF generator controls menu
Atten H old
Attenuator hold prevents the fixed RF output attenuators from
switching in and out, eliminating the loss of the output signal as the
level is changed. This function is helpful when making squelch
measurements.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When this function is set to On, the RF output level is restricted to a
range around the present Amplitudesetting. This range varies with
the amplitude setting. Attempting to set an amplitude outside the
allowed range results in an error message and beep (if the beeper is on).
RF output level accuracy is greatly degraded outside the allowed range.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF GENERATOR
Chapter 6
189
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Au d io In Lo
This field sets the AUDIO IN LO connector ’s state.
• Gndcauses the center pin of the connector to be connected directly to
chassis ground.
• Floatisolates the center pin of the connector from ground, providing
a floating input to the AF analyzer.
• 600 To Hiestablishes a 600-ohm impedance between the center
pins of the AUDIO IN LO and AUDIO IN HI connectors. Also, the
Ext Load Rfield is removed, since the load is now fixed to 600 ohms.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
Au d io Ou t
Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the AF generator to
the AUDIO OUT connector.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF GENERATOR
Au to/Nor m
This field specifies how the trigger level is set.
• Autoautomatically triggers if a triggering signal is not detected
within approximately 50 ms of the last trigger.
• Normrequires a specific triggering signal before triggering.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Automatic triggering should be used for signals >20 Hz. Normal
triggering should be used for signals ≤ 20 Hz.
Also, when measuring ≤ 1 Hz signals, you should set the Scope Tofield
in the AF ANALYZER screen to Inputto provide dc coupling to the
oscilloscope’s input.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: trigger controls menu
190
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Au to Zer o
This field is displayed for average power measurements.
Autois used to automatically zero the TX power measurement
periodically during operation.
Manualis used to override the Autofeature. When Manualis selected,
you must manually zero the TX power measurement by selecting the
TX Pwr Zerofield.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is p r esen t
RF ANALYZER
BW=
This field displays the spectrum analyzer ’s resolution bandwidth. The
resolution bandwidth and sweep rate are determined by the span
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: all menus except mask controls
Cen ter F r eq
This field sets the tune frequency for the center of the spectrum
analyzer ’s screen. The center frequency field is displayed when the RF
Displayfield on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to
Freq.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
This field also changes the center frequency of the tracking generator
and the RF analyzer.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: main controls menu
Chapter 6
191
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Con tr ols
The spectrum analyzer and oscilloscope settings are arranged in
several menus that are accessed using the Controls field. A list of
menu options is displayed when the controls field is selected.
See the descriptions for the individual control fields on each menu for
more information.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL
SCOPE
Con t/Sin gle
This field specifies whether the oscilloscope is continuously triggered
(Cont), or if it is only triggered each time Resetis selected (Single).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: trigger controls menu
DC F M Zer o
De-Em p Ga in
De-emphasis gain displays and selects the desired AF analyzer
de-emphasis amplifier gain.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
De-Em p h a sis
This setting selects or bypasses the 750 µs de-emphasis networks in the
audio analyzer and internal speaker circuitry.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
192
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Detect or
This setting selects the type of detector used when measuring and
displaying AF signal levels.
Det ect or Typ es
• RMSdisplays the root mean square (rms) value of signals.
•
RMS*SQRT2 displays the rms value of a signal multiplied by the
square root of 2.
• Pk+displays the positive peak value.
• Pk − displays the negative peak value.
• Pk± /2adds the positive and negative peak values, and divides the
sum by 2.
• Pk± Maxcompares the positive and negative peaks and displays the
greater value (polarity is not indicated).
• Pk+ Holddisplays and holds the positive peak value until the
measurement is reset. To reset, use Meas Reset (press and release
the Shift key, then the Hold key), select a different detector, or
re-select the same detector.
• Pk − Holddisplays and holds the negative peak value until the
measurement is reset. To reset, use Meas Reset (press and release
the Shift key, then the Hold key), select a different detector, or
re-select the same detector.
• Pk±/2 Holddivides the sum of the positive and negative peak values
by 2, and displays the value until the measurement is reset. To reset,
use Meas Reset (press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key),
select a different detector, or re-select the same detector.
• Pk± Mx Holdcompares the positive and negative peaks and displays
the greater value until the measurement is reset. To reset, use Meas
Reset (press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key), select a
different detector, or re-select the same detector.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
Disp la y
This field selects which limits to display on the spectrum analyzer ’s
mask: Upper, Lower, Both, or Off.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: mask controls menu
Chapter 6
193
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Ed it Ma sk
This field selects which limits to set or edit on the spectrum analyzer ’s
mask: Upper or Lower.
To change the mask use the EditPtand #Ptsfields.
information about the spectrum analyzer mask.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: mask controls menu
Ed itP t
This field selects which point to define or edit on the spectrum
analyzer ’s mask
information about the spectrum analyzer mask.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: mask controls menu
194
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Ext Loa d R
External load resistance is used to calculate and display AF power.
Power is calculated using the voltage measured at the AUDIO IN
connections and the resistance value you enter into this field.
This field is displayed only when the Audio Infield on the AF
ANALYZER screen is set to GNDor Float.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
To display audio power, set the AC Levelmeasurement’s unit of
measure to W(watts).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
Ext (TTL)
F ilter 1
This field selects an audio frequency filter which can be used to
condition the audio signal before it is analyzed by the audio frequency
analyzer.
The following filter choices are available:
•
•
•
•
<20 Hz HPF
50 Hz HPF
300Hz HPF
C MESSAGE
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The audio from the Test Set’s speaker is not affected by Filter 1 or
Filter 2 settings.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
Chapter 6
195
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
F ilter 2
This field selects an audio frequency filter which can be used to
condition the audio signal before it is analyzed by the audio frequency
analyzer.
The following filter choices are available:
•
•
•
•
•
300Hz LPF
3kHz LPF
15kHz LPF
> 99kHz LP
6 kHz BPF
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The audio from the Test Set’s speaker is not affected by Filter 1 or
Filter 2 settings.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
F M Cou p lin g
This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and
external modulation sources. The upper subfield selects ac or dc
coupling between the RF generator ’s frequency modulator and the
ANALOG MODULATION IN connector. The lower subfield, DC FM
Zero, zeroes any dc bias that exists when FM Couplingis set to DC.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
This field should be set to DCwhenever the AFGen2 Tofield is set to FM;
this provides better modulation response at low data rates.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF GENERATOR
196
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
F r eq (Delta Mr k r )
Marker frequency (Delta Mrkr Freq) displays the difference between
the frequency at delta marker and the frequency at the reference
marker on the spectrum analyzer. This measurement is displayed when
the Norm/Deltafield on the Markercontrols menu is set to Delta.
more information on the spectrum analyzer ’s delta marker.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: all menus (when marker controls is set to Delta) except
mask controls
F igu r e 6-1
Delt a a n d Refer en ce Ma r k er F r eq u en cy (F r eq ) a n d
Level (Lvl) Disp la y F ield s
Reference Marker
Frequency and
Level
Delta Marker
Frequency and
Level
F r eq (m a sk )
This field sets the frequency of the point on the spectrum analyzer
mask selected in the EditPtfield.
information about the spectrum analyzer mask.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: mask controls menu
Chapter 6
197
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
F r eq (n or m a l m a r k er )
Marker frequency (Marker Freq) displays the frequency at the
marker ’s present position on the spectrum analyzer when the
Norm/Deltafield on the Markercontrols menu is set to Norm.
more information about using the spectrum analyzer ’s markers.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When switching from delta mode to normal mode, the delta marker
becomes the normal marker.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: all menus (when in normal mode) except mask controls
F igu r e 6-2
Nor m a l Ma r k er F r eq u en cy (F r eq ) a n d Level (Lvl) Disp la y F ield s
Normal Marker
Frequency and
Level
F r eq (R ef Mr k r )
Marker frequency (Ref Mrkr Freq) displays the frequency at the
reference marker ’s present position on the spectrum analyzer. This
marker is displayed when the Norm/Deltafield on the Markercontrols
menu is set to Delta.
more information on the spectrum analyzer ’s delta marker.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: all menus (when marker controls is set to Delta) except
mask controls
198
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Ga in Cn tl
AF analyzer gain control specifies whether the AF analyzer’s gain
settings are controlled automatically by AF autoranging (Auto), or by
manual control (Hold).
The following settings are affected by AF autoranging:
•
•
•
Input Gain
De-Emp Gain
Notch Gain
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The normal mode of operation for the Gain Cntlfield is Auto, allowing
the instrument to adjust the AF gain settings for optimum
measurement accuracy.
This field can be set to Holdto disable the autoranging routines to
increase measurement speed. However, this requires you to select the
desired gain settings manually for each measurement.
Au t or a n gin g In t er fer en ce After a signal is input, the RF
autoranging function (Auto) takes a small amount of time to determine
the required input attenuator setting. If your transmitter begins
sending information the instant it transmits, the initial part of the
demodulated signal may not appear on the oscilloscope. When trying to
capture the initial modulation waveform of a signal on the oscilloscope,
set the upper field to Holdand set the lower field to an appropriate level
for the signal being decoded (start with 40 dB).
Setting the upper field to Holdalso prevents the RF autoranging
process from interrupting spectrum analyzer operation when a signal is
first measured. This can be helpful when you need to see the signal the
instant the source is input, but requires you to set the needed amount of
input attenuation.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
IF F ilt er
This field selects the desired IF filter bandwidth for modulated signals
being analyzed.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF ANALYZER
Chapter 6
199
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
In p u t Atten
Input attenuation sets the amount of input attenuation for the RF
IN/OUT and ANT IN connectors. This function controls two settings:
•
The upper field determines if you want the instrument to set the
attenuation automatically (Auto), or if you want to set the value
manually (Hold).
•
The lower field displays the present attenuation value, and is used to
set the desired attenuation level when the upper area is set to Hold.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Au t or a n gin g In t er fer en ce After a signal is input, the RF
autoranging function (Auto) takes a small amount of time to determine
the required input attenuator setting. If your transmitter begins
sending information the instant it transmits, the initial part of the
demodulated signal may not appear on the oscilloscope. When trying to
capture the initial modulation waveform of a signal on the oscilloscope,
set the upper field to Holdand set the lower field to an appropriate level
for the signal being decoded (start with 40 dB).
Setting the upper field to Holdalso prevents the RF autoranging
process from interrupting spectrum analyzer operation when a signal is
first measured. This can be helpful when you need to see the signal the
instant the source is input, but requires you to set the needed amount of
input attenuation.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF ANALYZER
SPEC ANL: auxiliary controls menu
In p u t Ga in
This field displays and selects the gain of the AF analyzer ’s input
amplifier. The choices are 0 dB, 20 dB, or 40 dB. Refer to the Gain Cntl
field more information.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALZYER
200
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
In p u t P or t
This field selects the RF IN/OUT or ANT IN port for making RF
measurements. The RF IN/OUT port must be used for making TX
power measurements.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
If the RF power at the RF IN/OUT port exceeds allowable limits, a loud
warning signal sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen.
If this occurs, disconnect the RF power, reset using Meas Reset (press
and release the Shift key, then the Hold key), and allow the Test Set to
cool off for approximately two minutes before making any other
measurements on this port.
The ANT IN (antenna input) connector provides a highly-sensitive
input for very low level signals (such as “off the air” measurements).
You cannot measure TX (RF) power on the RF ANALYZER screen using
the ANT IN port.
CAUTION
Connecting a signal of >60 mW to the ANT IN port can cause
instrument damage (although internal protection circuits can typically
withstand a short-duration signal of several Watts).
If the overpower circuit is triggered (signified by a warning message at
the top of the screen), remove the signal from the ANT IN port, and
reset using Meas Reset (press and release the Shift key, then the Hold
key) or turn the Test Set off and on.
Maximum signal levels at the RF IN/OUT, DUPLEX OUT, and ANT IN
ports are printed on the connector panel. Exceeding these levels can
cause permanent instrument damage.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: RF IN/ANT main controls menu
RF ANALYZER
In ter n a l
This field selects the trigger source.
• Internaluses the signal being displayed for triggering.
• Ext (TTL)uses the EXT SCOPE TRIGGER INPUT for triggering.
This is a TTL level trigger (approximately 2.5 V).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: trigger controls menu
Chapter 6
201
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Level (d iv)
This control is divided into two subfields:
The upper subfield (0.00) sets the internal trigger level as a function of
vertical divisions. The trigger level is indicated by small pointers that
appear on each side of the screen (only used for internal triggering).
The lower subfield (Pos/Neg) specifies whether triggering happens
when the waveform being measured is positive-going (Pos), or
negative-going (Neg).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: trigger controls menu
Level (m a sk )
This field sets the level of the point on the spectrum analyzer mask
selected in the EditPtfield.
information about the spectrum analyzer mask.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: mask controls menu
Lvl (Delta Mr k r )
Marker level (Delta Mrkr Lvl) displays the difference between the
level at delta marker and the level at the reference marker on the
spectrum analyzer. This marker is displayed when the Norm/Delta
more information on the spectrum analyzer ’s delta marker.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: all menus (when marker controls is set to Delta) except
mask controls
202
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Lvl (m a r k er )
This measurement field displays the signal level of the signal at the
current marker position on the oscilloscope.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The unit-of-measure for this field is dependent on the source of the
signal being measured. For instance, when measuring a signal from the
AUDIO IN connector, the amplitude is measured in Volts. When looking
at a signal from the FM demodulator, the amplitude is given in units of
kHz.
When the Vert Offsetfield is ≠ 0.00, the displayed marker level is
referenced to the center line generated by the vertical offset feature, not
the center line of the screen.
The Ref Set function can be used with this measurement to display
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: all control menus
Lvl (n or m a l m a r k er )
Marker frequency (Marker Lvl) displays the frequency at the marker’s
present position on the spectrum analyzer when the Norm/Deltafield
more information about using the spectrum analyzer ’s markers.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When switching from delta mode to normal mode, the delta marker
becomes the normal marker.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: all menus except mask controls
Chapter 6
203
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Lvl (Ref Mr k r )
Marker level (Ref Mrkr Lvl) displays the level at the reference
marker ’s present position on the spectrum analyzer. This marker is
displayed when the Norm/Deltafield on the Markercontrols menu is
more information on the spectrum analyzer ’s delta marker.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: all menus (when marker controls is set to Delta) except
mask controls
Ma r k er To P ea k +
Peak+causes the marker to move to the maximum value of the average
level measured on the display.
Because this functions look at the average value for each displayed
pixel, the marker may not appear directly on the displayed peak of a
noisy signal.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: marker controls menu
Ma r k er To P ea k -
Peak − causes the marker to move to the minimum value of the average
level measured on the display.
Because this functions look at the average value for each displayed
pixel, the marker may not appear directly on the displayed peak of a
noisy signal.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: marker controls menu
204
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Ma r k er To
These two fields position the spectrum analyzer ’s marker as follows:
• Peakmoves the marker to the highest peak and enters the location
in the Positionfield.
• Next Peakmoves the marker to the next peak to the right and
enters the location in the Positionfield.
• Center Freqchanges the center frequency value to match the
current position of the marker.
• Ref Levelchanges the reference level setting to match the current
position of the marker.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: marker controls menu
Ma sk Beep
When the signal exceeds the limits set by the spectrum analyzer mask,
the FAIL indicator is displayed along with an audible tone (beep). You
can use this field to turn on (or off) the beep.
This field is displayed only when the spectrum analyzers mask is
displayed (Displayfield on Maskcontrols menu set to UpperOnly,
LowerOnly, or Both.)
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: mask controls menu
Ma sk Typ e
This field selects the type of spectrum analyzer mask.
•
Fix sets the mask to absolute limits defined in the #Pts, EditPoint,
Lvl, and Freqfields. When using fixed limits a change in the center
frequency or level may cause the mask to move beyond the viewable
area of the screen.
• Relsets the mask relative to the center frequency and reference
level defined in the Center Freqand Ref Lvlfields on the spectrum
analyzer ’s Maincontrols menu. The mask remains displayed even
though the center frequency or reference level are changed.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: mask controls menu
Chapter 6
205
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Mod In To
This modulation input field defines how an external modulation source
is used with the RF generator. Two fields are used:
•
The upper field determines whether the ANALOG MODULATION
IN signal is set for AM or FM modulation of the RF GENERATOR.
•
The lower field sets the modulation sensitivity. For instance, if FM
(/Vpk)is selected for the upper field, and you set the lower field to
1.0000 kHz, the RF generator will deviate 1 kHz for every 1 Volt
peak at the ANALOG MODULATION IN connector.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF GENERATOR
No P k /Avg
This field performs two functions:
Pk Hold (peak hold) prevents the spectrum analyzer from erasing the
previous trace each time it sweeps. This causes the traces to ‘build-up’
on the screen until Off, No Pk/Avgor measurement reset (using Meas
Reset (press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key) is performed.
This allows the capture of transient signals that are not displayed long
enough to view during normal operation.
Avg 1through 100(video averaging) enables the spectrum analyzer to
display a trace representing the average of several measurements. The
number of samples used for measurement averaging range from 1 to
100 (see below). No Pk/Avgand Offfunction identically. Offis
provided to maintain backwards compatibility with earlier firmware
and software.
• No Pk/Avgmeans that peak hold and video averaging are off.
• Pk Holdmeans that peak hold is on.
• Avg [n]enables video averaging over [n] measurements,
where n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, 50, or 100
• Offmeans that peak hold and video averaging are off.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
After capturing the desired signal, you can use the hold function (press
Hold key) to prevent additional signals from building-up on the display.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: auxiliary controls menu
206
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Nor m a lize
This area performs three display operations:
• Save Bsaves the currently displayed trace for the A-B operation.
• A Onlyprovides a continuously updated display (the “normal” mode
of operation).
• A-Bdisplays the difference between the trace saved using Save B
and the currently displayed trace. The comparison can yield either
losses or gains in amplitude.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The A-B function works correctly only if the center frequency and span
settings are the same for both signals.
The reference level (Ref Level) can be changed (on the Maincontrols
menu) to move the trace below the top line of the display if the A-B
function results in a gain.
The Hold key can be used to “freeze” the display at any time. This allows
you to view a trace before performing the Save B or A-B functions.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: auxiliary controls menu
Nor m /Delta
This field selects which marker will be controlled by the marker
positioning fields on the spectrum analyzer ’s Markermenu.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: marker controls menu
Chapter 6
207
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Notch F r eq
This field sets the center frequency for the variable frequency notch
filter. It is typically used for distortion and SINAD measurements at
frequencies below or above the standard 1 kHz notch filter.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When the Notch Couplfield on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
screen is set to AFGen1, this filter and the AFGen1 Freqfield match
their settings. A warning message is then displayed if you attempt to
set the AFGen1 Freqvalue outside the 300 Hz to 10 kHz range of this
filter. When the Notch Couplfield is set to None, this filter and AFGen1
Freqoperate independently.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
Notch Ga in
This field displays and selects the gain of the AF analyzer ’s notch filter
amplifier. This amplifier is only used for making SINAD and distortion
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
Offset F r eq
Frequency offset (RF generator) sets the difference between the
instantaneous frequencies of the tracking generator and the center
frequency of the spectrum analyzer.
This field is displayed only when Trackis selected in the Track/Fixed
field on the RF Gencontrols menu.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The offset can be a positive or negative value. When set to zero, the
tracking generator produces a sweeping signal that matches the
spectrum analyzer ’s tune frequency.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: RF generator controls menu
208
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Ou tp u t P or t
This field selects the RF generator ’s output port. Higher RF generator
levels are available at the DUPLEX OUT port than at the RF IN/OUT
port.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
CAUTION
Applying reverse RF power to the DUPLEX OUT connector can damage
the instrument. (A message is displayed when an overpower conditions
occurs.) Whenever possible, use the RF IN/OUT connector when testing
transceivers to prevent damage from accidental transmitter keying.
If a reverse-power condition triggers the internal protection circuit,
remove the reverse-power signal and reset using Meas Reset (press and
release the Shift key, then the Hold key) or turn the Test Set off and on
to reset it.
Maximum signal levels at the RF IN/OUT, DUPLEX OUT, and ANT IN
ports are printed on the connector panel. Exceeding these levels can
cause permanent instrument damage.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF GENERATOR
SPEC ANL: (Fixed) RF generator controls menu
P k Det To
This field selects the signal source for the peak detectors. This allows
you to bypass certain sections of the AF analyzer ’s circuitry when
making ac-level measurements.
• Filtersanalyzes the signal after filtering through Filter 1.
• De-Empanalyzes the signal after filtering through Filter 1 and
Filter 2, and after de-emphasis.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
Chapter 6
209
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
P or t/Sw eep
This control performs two functions:
•
•
The upper field specifies the output port of the tracking generator.
The lower field specifies whether the tracking generator sweeps from
low-to-high frequencies (Norm), or from high-to-low frequencies
(Invert). (The spectrum analyzer always sweeps from low to high
frequencies.) The swept frequency range is determined by the Span
setting in the spectrum analyzer ’s main controls menu.
This field is displayed only when Trackis selected in the Track/Fixed
field on the spectrum analyzer ’s RF Gencontrols menu.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When using the tracking generator, if the output port is set to RF Out,
or the main menu Input Portis set to RF In, internal instrument
coupling can occur. For the best isolation between the tracking
generator and the spectrum analyzer, use Duplfor the output, and Ant
for the input.
For measurements on high-power devices, such as amplifiers, use the
RF IN/OUT port for the input.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: RF generator controls menu
P osition
This field indicates the number of scale divisions from the left side of
the screen to the marker.
Use the DATA ENTRY keys or cursor-control knob to move the marker
to any point on the displayed signal.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: marker controls menu
SPEC ANL: marker controls menu
210
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
P os/Neg
Ref Level
Reference level sets the amplitude reference level for the top line of the
display. All signals displayed are referenced to this line.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The unit-of-measure for the reference can be changed as needed. For
instance, 0 dBm, 0.224 V, 107.0 dBmV, and 0.00100 W can all be used to
represent the same level.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: main controls menu
Ref Mr k r
In the delta marker mode, a second (reference) marker is placed at the
current location of the marker. The first marker becomes a moveable
delta marker. When the delta marker is moved, the difference in
frequency and level between the reference marker and the delta marker
are shown as the Delta Mrkrmeasurements on the right-hand side of
the screen. The reference marker can be set to either Holdor Norm.
When the Ref Mrkrfield is set to Hold, the reference marker is frozen
at its current position (frequency and level) regardless of changes in the
signal level.
When you switch from Holdto Norm, the reference marker will stay at
its current horizontal setting (frequency), but will track the level of the
incoming signal.
When switching from delta mode to normal mode, the delta marker
becomes the normal marker.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: all menus except mask controls
Chapter 6
211
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Reset
Reset retriggers the measurement when Singletriggering is selected.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: trigger controls menu
RF Ch a n n el
The RF Channel field is displayed on the screens listed below when the
RF Displayfield on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to
Chan.
This field displays the current channel number. Channel tuning
eliminates the need to set transmit and receive frequencies directly into
the Test Set. Once the radio’s RF channel standard is selected, you only
have to enter the channel number to automatically set the RF
Generatorand RF Analyzerto the correct frequency.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
To utilize the correct transmit and receive frequencies select the
appropriate channel standard from the RF Chan Stdfield on the
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.
The lower subfield of the RF Channelfield on the spectrum analyzer ’s
RF Gencontrols menu also sets the RF channel standard.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF ANALYZER
SPEC ANL: RF generator or main controls menu
RF Cn t Ga te
RF counter gate specifies how long the RF counter samples the signal
before displaying the frequency. Specifying a shorter gate time may
enable you to see frequency fluctuations that might not be seen using a
longer gate time.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF ANALYZER
212
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
RF Gen F r eq
This field sets the RF generator ’s frequency.
This field is displayed on the screens listed below when the RF Display
field on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to Freq.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: RF Gen controls menu
RF GENERATOR
RF In /An t
This field selects the input port for the spectrum analyzer.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Maximum signal levels are printed on the connector panel.
CAUTION
Connecting a signal of >60 mW to the ANT IN port can cause
instrument damage (although internal protection circuits can typically
withstand a short-duration signal of several Watts).
If the overpower circuit is triggered (signified by a warning message at
the top of the screen), remove the signal from the ANT IN port, and
reset using Meas Reset (press and release the Shift key, then the Hold
key) or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.
Using the ANT IN port with the Sensitivityfield set to Highcan
result in uncalibrated operation (a message appears on the screen when
this happens). The purpose for the high sensitivity setting is to allow
you to look and listen to very low level signals when absolute accuracy
is not essential.
information.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL
Chapter 6
213
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Scop e To
This field selects the signal source for the oscilloscope. This allows you
to bypass certain sections of the AF analyzer’s circuitry when viewing
and measuring a signal. It also allows you to select measurement paths
that include additional gain stages, improving the oscilloscope’s
resolution when measuring low-level signals.
• Inputlooks at the unfiltered signal directly from the input.
• Filterslooks at the signal after filtering through Filter 1 and
Filter 2.
• De-Emplooks at the signal after filtering through Filter 1 and
Filter 2, and after 750 µs de-emphasis (if the De-emphasisfield is
set to 750 us.)
• Notchlooks at the signal after filtering through Filter 1 and Filter 2,
after de-emphasis (if used), and after the notch filter.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
Sen sitivity (RF a n a lyzer )
RF analyzer sensitivity adds about 6 dB of sensitivity for the ANT IN
port when Highis selected and the Input Attenfield is set to 0 dB.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Selecting Highsensitivity may cause spectrum analyzer measurements
to be uncalibrated when the ANT IN port is used (a message appears
when this occurs).
High-level AM measurements may be distorted when high sensitivity is
used with the ANT IN port.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF ANALYZER
214
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Sen sitivity (sp ectr u m a n a lyzer )
This area performs two functions:
•
The lower field selects the vertical resolution of the display. You can
choose from 1 dB, 2 dB, or 10 dB per graticule.
•
The upper field selects Normalor Highsensitivity for the RF input.
The Highsetting adds about 6 dB of sensitivity to the ANT IN port
(when the Input Attenfield is set to 0 dB) for looking at very low
level signals. However, this setting can cause measurements to be
uncalibrated (indicated by a message on the screen). Highsensitivity
can also cause high-level AM signals to be distorted.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: auxiliary controls menu
Settlin g
This field selects the settling time for making AF measurements. Lower
frequency signals require additional settling time (Slow). Higher
frequency measurements require less settling time (Fast).
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Use Slowfor ≤200 Hz signals. Use Fastfor >200 Hz signals.
If the signal being measured is a composite of different frequencies
above and below 200 Hz, select the appropriate filtering to analyze the
desired signal component.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALZYER
Chapter 6
215
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Sp a n
Sets the span of frequencies to be displayed on the screen.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When the tracking generator is used, the span also defines the
frequency sweep range.
Spans >1.5 MHz disable the AF analyzer when the analyzer’s AF Anl
Infield is set to FM Demod, AM Demod, or SSB Demod. This disables all
the AF analyzer’s measurement and output functions. When the AF
analyzer ’s AF Anl Infield is set to any of the other available inputs,
such as Audio Inor Ext Mod, the speaker and SCOPE MONITOR
OUTPUT are not affected when the spectrum analyzer ’s span is
changed.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: main controls menu
Sp ea k er ALC
Speaker automatic level control enables/disables the ALC function for
the instrument’s internal speaker. When Onis selected, the speaker
volume is independent of the signal level being measured. When Offis
selected, the speaker volume is dependent on the signal level being
measured.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
Sp ea k er Vol
Speaker Volume enables/disables the instrument’s internal speaker.
When Potis selected, the Volume control knob operates normally. When
Offis selected, the speaker is disconnected.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
AF ANALYZER
216
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Squ elch
This setting determines the squelch operation when demodulating FM,
AM, or SSB signals. Three settings are available:
• Potuses the front-panel SQUELCH knob for squelch level
adjustment.
• Opendisables squelch operation.
• Fixedsets the squelch to a fixed level, disabling the front-panel
SQUELCH knob control.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Most measurements are not displayed on the screen if the incoming
signal falls below the squelch level (with the exception of TX Power).
The measurements are replaced by four dashes (- - - -) to indicate they
have been squelched.
Oscilloscope measurements are also disabled when the signal has been
squelched.
Spectrum analyzer measurements are not affected by the squelch
setting (although squelch still affects whether the demodulated signal
can be heard while viewing the RF signal).
Trying to read a squelched measurement using GPIB will cause your
program to halt until the squelch is either turned down, a measurement
is made, or until a program time-out aborts the measurement.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF ANALYZER
Chapter 6
217
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Tim e
This measurement displays the time elapsed from the trigger point to
the current marker position.
The Ref Set function can be used with this measurement to display time
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: all control menus
Tim e/d iv
This field selects the horizontal sweep time per division.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The time-per-division is selected from a list of choices.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: main controls menu
Tr a ck /F ixed
When this field is set to Track, the tracking generator is enabled. The
tracking generator performs a frequency sweep operation. The start
and stop frequencies are determined by the Span setting (main controls
menu). The tracking generator allows you to characterize devices (such
as filter networks) over wide span of frequencies.
An RF offset can be set between the tracking generator and the center
frequency of the spectrum analyzer. This allows you to look at a signal
that is related to a source whose frequency is outside the displayed
span.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SPEC ANL: RF generator controls menu
218
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Tr ig-Dela y
The trigger delay is used to specify the time relationship between the
trigger and displayed signal.
• Positivevalues delay the measurement trigger by a specific period.
The delayed trigger point is the left edge of the screen.
• Negativevalues perform a pre-trigger function, displaying a section
of the waveform before the trigger point. The trigger point is
indicated by small pointers that appear at the top and bottom of the
screen.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Nega t ive Va lu e The maximum negative delay cannot exceed ten
divisions of the current time-per-division setting. For example; if the
Time/Divfield is set to 1 ms, the maximum allowed negative delay is
−10 ms. Larger negative numbers cause an Excessive negative
Trig-Delay will be truncated.message.
P osit ive Va lu es For Time/Divsettings of 50 µs/div and smaller, the
maximum delay is 400 ms.
For Time/Divsettings of 100 µs/div and larger, the maximum delay is
3300 ms.
Resolu tion
For delays of 400 ms and less, the resolution is 6.4 ms. For delays
greater than 400 ms, the resolution is 51.2 ms. All entries are rounded
to the nearest multiple of 6.4 ms or 51.2 ms (depending on the delay
value).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: trigger controls menu
Chapter 6
219
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Tu n e F r eq
This field is displayed when the RF Displayfield on the
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to Freq.
RF analyzer tune frequency sets the center frequency for the RF signal
to be analyzed.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF ANALYZER
TX P w r Mea s
The transmitter power measurement field specifies how transmitter
power measurements are made:
• Peakcan be used to measure AM, FM, and un-modulated (CW)
signals.
• Samplecan be used to measure FM or CW signals with increased
measurement speed. This method can only be used with signals
having no amplitude modulation component.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
If you change this field, zero the power measurement (using the TX Pwr
Zerofield) before measuring power.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF ANALYZER
220
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
TX P w r Zer o
The transmitter power zero function establishes a 0.0000 W reference
for measuring RF power at the RF IN/OUT port.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When power is applied to the RF IN/OUT connector, the temperature of
the internal circuitry increases. This can cause changes in the TX
power measurement when low power levels are measured immediately
following high power measurements.
When alternately making high and low power measurements, always
zero the power meter immediately before making the low power
measurements; this provides the best measurement accuracy.
If the Auto Zerofield is set to Auto, the TX power measurement is
periodically zeroed (automatically). Manual calibration is only needed if
Auto Zerois set to Manual, or if you are measuring highly variable
signal levels (as mentioned above).
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
RF ANALYZER
Ver t/d iv
Vertical sensitivity sets the vertical amplitude per division.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The value for this field is selected from a list of choices.
Depending on the AF analyzer ’s AF Anl Insetting, the units for this
field may be in Volts, kHz, or Percent (AM). For example; if the AF Anl
Infield is set to FM Demod, the amplitude is displayed in kHz/div.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: main controls menu
Chapter 6
221
Analog Measurements - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for Analog Measurements
Ver t Offset
Vertical offset moves the displayed signal above or below the
oscilloscope’s fixed centerline.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
A centerline is displayed for the signal when an offset is used.
When the vertical offset is ≠0.00, the marker level is referenced to the
center line generated by the vertical offset feature, not the center line of
the screen.
Scr een s on w h ich t h is field is d isp la yed
SCOPE: main controls menu
222
Chapter 6
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Anlgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
•
•
•
224
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Configuring the Instrument
Con figu r in g th e In str u m en t
Settin g th e Da te a n d Tim e
The Test Set has a built-in clock that keeps track of the date and time.
It is powered by an internal battery to keep it operating when the
instrument is off.
To set the date and time
Step 1. Access the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.
Step 2. Select the Datefield and use the DATA ENTRY keys to enter the date
(MMDDYY -- October 31, 1997 = 103197).
Step 3. Select the Timefield and use the DATA ENTRY keys to enter the time
(HH.MM -- 2:13 pm = 14.13).
Ch a n gin g th e Beep er ’s Volu m e
The beeper alerts you to important operating and measurement
conditions. It beeps any time a message is displayed at the top of the
screen. These messages warn you of conditions such as exceeding the
RF input level or trying to set a field to an unacceptable value.
Therefore, it is recommended that you do not disable the beeper.
To change the beeper’s volume
Step 1. Access the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.
Step 2. Select the Beeperfield to display the volume choices.
Step 3. Select the desired choice.
Tu r n in g Off User Messa ges
To t u r n off u ser m essa ges
Step 1. Access the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.
Step 2. Set the Display User Mssgsfield to No.
To d isp la y u ser m essa ges
Step 1. Access the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.
Step 2. Set the Display User Mssgsfield to Yes.
Chapter 7
225
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Configuring for Printing A Screen
Con figu r in g for P r in tin g A Scr een
P r in tin g a Scr een
NOTE
Throughout this manual, the terms “GPIB” and “HP-IB” are used
interchangeably.
Step 1. Connect a printer to the appropriate connector (SERIAL 9, PARALLEL
15, HP-IB).
Step 2. Go to the PRINTER CONFIGURE screen set the Printer Port:field
to the appropriate type of printer connection.
If HP-IBis selected, enter the GPIB address (Printer Adrs) of the
printer.
Step 3. Select the type of printer you are using in the Modelfield. If your
printer is not listed, configure your printer to emulate one that is listed.
(Some printers that operate with Windows only are not supported.)
Step 4. Enter a Print Titleif desired. This text will appear at the top of your
printout.
a . Use the knob to select letters, numbers, or symbols from the list (up
to 50 characters).
b. Select Donefrom the list when you have finished the title.
Step 5. Display the screen you want to print and press Print.
To in t er r u p t p r in t in g
Step 1. Go to the PRINTER CONFIGURE screen.
Step 2. Select the Abort Printfield.
226
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Con tr ol F ield s on t h e Con figu r a tion Scr een s
Abor t P r in t
Select this field to interrupt the printing job in progress.
Abort Print is not directly programmable over the GPIB.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
PRINTER CONFIGURE
An ten n a In
This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the ANT IN port
and the device-under-test.
Enter a positive value to indicate a gain (such as an amplifier). The
spectrum analyzer ’s marker level (Lvl) measurement is automatically
reduced by that amount. The spectrum analyzer ’s Ref Levelis
automatically decreased by the same amount, so the trace position does
not appear to change.
Enter a negative value to indicate a loss (such as cable loss). The
spectrum analyzer marker ’s level (Lvl) measurement is automatically
increased by that amount. The spectrum analyzer ’s Ref Levelis
automatically increased by the same amount, so the trace position does
not appear to change.
This field is only used when the RF Level Offsetfield is set to On. See
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
Chapter 7
227
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Ba se F r eq (User Defin ed )
The base frequency field sets the RF generator reference for channel 0
(zero) when the RF Chan Stdfield is set to USER-DEF, and the RF
Displayfield is set to Chan.
Channel frequencies are calculated using the following formula:
Channel N = Base Frequency + (N)(Channel Spacing)
The Base Frequency is calculated using the following formula:
Base Frequency = Channel 1 Frequency − Channel Spacing
For example, if your multi-channel radio’s lowest receive channel
frequency is 870.030 MHz and the system channel spacing is 30 kHz,
you would enter 870 MHzin this field. You would also use the Chan
Spaceand (Gen)-(Anl)fields to tell the Test Set where other transmit
and receive channel frequencies are in relation to the base frequency,
and whether or not the system is duplex.
For more information see the following related topics:
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The value of this field is only used if the RF Displayfield is set to Chan,
and the RF Chan Stdfield is set to USER-DEF.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
Beep er
This field changes the audio beeper volume by selecting the desired
level from a list of choices (Off, Quiet, Loud). The beeper always beeps
when the instrument is turned on, regardless of this setting.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The beeper alerts you any time a message is displayed. Since a message
may be removed from the screen before you notice it, it is better to leave
the beeper on to alert you to errors during operation.
The beeper ’s volume setting is retained when the instrument is turned
off.
228
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
Ca ll
• Originateplaces a call using the dialing sequence entered in the
Number to Callfield. This field is inactive when the Modem Mode
field is set to Disable.
• Disconnectcauses the modem to disconnect from the call in
progress. It also cancels any pending call origination Retries. This
field is inactive when the Modem Modefield is set to Disable.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
Ch a n Sp a ce (User Defin ed )
This field specifies the RF channel spacing when the RF Displayfield
is set to Chan, and the RF Chan Stdfield is set to USER-DEF.
For example, entering 25 kHzcauses a 25 kHz spacing between each
channel. If the receive frequency for channel 1 is 150.500 MHz, channel
2’s receive frequency would be 150.525 MHz.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The value of this field is only used if the RF Displayfield is set to Chan,
and the RF Chan Stdfield is set to USER-DEF.
For more information see the following related topics:
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
CDMA Std
This field allows you to specify the CDMA standard to be used in Code
Domain measurements. Select IS-95 onlyto show Power, Timing and
Phase using IS-95 protocol. Select IS-2000to show Power, Complex
Power, Power & Noise and Fast Power Synchronize, using the IS-2000
protocol.
For more information on the results of this selection see:
Chapter 7
229
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
230
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Com m a n d Esca p e Ch a r a cter
This field allows you enter a one-character, non-printable escape
character to define your own escape command sequence.
The Decimal Equivalentof the escape character is displayed to the
right of the entry. This character is sent to the modem automatically
238).
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
Con n ection Tim e-ou t
This field sets the number of seconds to wait before aborting a
connection attempt. This applies to both answer and originate
activities. This information is sent to the modem automatically when
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
Da ta Len gth
This field specifies the number of bits used for each word of serial data
when using the serial port.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When in remote mode (Remote Modefield is set to On), this field is
inaccessible.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
Chapter 7
231
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Da te
This field specifies the current date for the internal clock. The date can
be read by a controller using GPIB and printed on test results.
The format is MMDDYY (Month Day Year), using two digits for each
term. When entering months J anuary through September (01-09), the
leading zero is not displayed when entered. Example; May 5, 1993 is
entered as 050593, but is displayed as 50593.
The internal clock still functions when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
Disp la y User Messa ges
This field controls whether or not user messages and prompts are
displayed at the top of the screen when a user action is required or an
error occurs.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
Du p lex Ou t
This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the DUPLEX OUT
port and the device-under-test.
•
Enter a positive value to indicate a gain (such as an amplifier gain).
The RF generator ’s level is automatically set that amount below
what is indicated in the RF generator ’s Amplitudefield. (Example; if
this value is 10 dB, and the Amplitudefield shows 0 dBm, the actual
level out this port is −10 dBm.) The value at the output of the
external amplifier should then be at the level indicated in the
Amplitudefield.
•
Enter a negative value to indicate a loss (such as cable loss). The RF
generator ’s level is automatically set that amount above what is
indicated in the RF generator ’s Amplitudefield to compensate. The
value at the opposite end of the cable (loss) should then be at the
level indicated in the Amplitudefield; unless the resulting RF
generator setting exceeds the maximum output level, then an error
occurs: Input value out of range. In that case, reduce the
Amplitudesetting, or decrease the Duplex Outvalue.
This field is only used when the RF Level Offsetfield is set to On.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
232
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Ext Ref In
This field selects the reference frequency of the signal at the EXT REF
IN connector. You can select 1, 2, 5, or 10 MHz; 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, or 16x
chip.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
This signal is used as a reference for, and directly affects, these
functions:
RF Generator Frequency (including the Tracking Generator)
RF Frequency Counter
AF Frequency Counter
RF Analyzer Tune Frequency
Spectrum Analyzer Center Frequency
Chapter 7
233
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
F low Con tr ol
The flow control field is used when sending or receiving serial data.
• Nonedisables the Xon/Xoff function.
• Xon/Xofflets the Test Set “talk/listen” to the transceiver to alter the
rate of the data being sent.
• Hardwareuses the serial port’s RTS and CTS lines to transfer data
at high baud rates.
NOTE
Do not turn flow control on (set Flow Cntl to Hardwarein the I/O
CONFIGURE screen) for the serial port until you have a device
attached to the port that can respond to the flow control
communications.
Example: You have a printer attached to SERIAL PORT 9. Before you
run any IBASIC software (for example, the RFTOOLS program), you
must make sure that the printer is properly connected and that its
power is turned on.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Baud rates of 38400 and above must use Hardwareflow control.
When in remote mode (Remote Modefield is set to On), this field is
inaccessible.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
F r a m e Clock Ou tp u t
This field selects the frame clock signal to send to the FRAME CLOCK
OUT connector.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
234
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
(Gen )-(An l)
This field is used with the RF Offsetfield to specify the amount of
frequency offset between the RF generator and RF analyzer.
This field is always displayed when the RF Displayfield is set to Freq.
information.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
(Gen )-(An l) (User Defin ed )
This field defines the receiver-transmitter frequency offset when using
user-defined channel operation.
Use a positive value (such as 45 MHz) when the radio’s receive
frequency is higher than the transmit frequency.
Use a negative value (such as −45 MHz) when the radio’s receive
frequency is lower than the transmit frequency.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The value of this field is only used if the RF Displayfield is set to Chan,
and the RF Chan Stdfield is set to USER-DEF.
For more information see the following related topics:
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
Chapter 7
235
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
GP IB Ad r s
This field is used to display and change the GPIB address of the Test
Set.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The address can be set from 0 to 30 by using the DATA keys, or by
pushing and then turning the cursor-control knob.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
Hold -off Dela y
This field sets the number of seconds to wait before attempting an
origination. This applies to the delay prior to attempting a dialback as
well as the delay prior to retrying an origination as part of the retry
sequence.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
IBASIC Ech o
This field enables/disables screen and error message echoing from
IBASIC.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
236
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
In com in g Ca ll Secu r ity
This field controls the usage of a password security challenge.
• Off- no password challenge on connection
• On- issues a password challenge on connection. The user must enter
a password. The password must match the string entered in the
Passwordfield.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The password is case sensitive and may not contain a space.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
In st Ech o
This field enables/disables character and screen echoing when using an
external ASCII RS-232 terminal or computer to enter or edit IBASIC
programs.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
Lin es/P a ge
This field is used to specify how many lines are printed per page.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
PRINTER CONFIGURE
Mod e
This field sets the GPIB operating mode. Talk&Lstnis used for normal
GPIB operation. Controlis used to control external instruments using
the Test Set.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
Chapter 7
237
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Mod el
This field is used to specify the type of printer used. If your printer is
not listed in the Choicesmenu when you select this field, configure
your printer to emulate one of those that is listed. (Some printers that
operate with Windows only are not supported.)
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
PRINTER CONFIGURE
Mod em Con figu r a tion
This field is used to configure the modem. When Send to Hardwareis
selected, an automatically generated string is sent. This initial string
includes the escape character and connection time-out information.
After this initial string is sent to the modem, the strings entered in the
Modem Initialization/Configurationfield are sent.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Do not send configuration strings when a data session is in progress.
This field is inactive when the Modem Modefield is set to Disable.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
238
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Mod em In itia liza t ion /Con figu r a tion
This field is used to enter configuration strings for the modem. It is a
three-line field. Each string has a maximum of 40 characters. Blank
lines will be skipped.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
To send these strings to the modem, select Send to Hardwareunder
the Modem Configurationfield.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
An initial string containing the decimal equivalent of the escape
character and the value of the connection time-out is automatically
generated and sent when Send to Hardwareis selected. Then the
strings entered in this field are sent.
The first line is blank by default, but can be used to make settings such
as baud rate if your modem is not set to autobaud detection. The second
and third line’s default settings are common modem configuration
strings, but they can be changed if they do not match your modem’s
requirements. (Refer to you modem’s documentation for further
information.)
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
Mod em Mod e
This field selects modem’s response to a carrier detect signal.
• Disableturns off the modem mode.
• Ignoredisregards or hangs-up any calls. The modem is not enabled
to look for incoming calls.
• Answerestablishes a data session in response to the carrier detect
signal.
• Dialback, answers the call, then drops the call (disconnects), then
originates a call to the number entered in the Modem Number to
Callfield.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
Chapter 7
239
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Notch Cou p l
This field selects if the Notch Freqsetting of the AF ANALYZER
screen is coupled to the AF Gen1 Freqsetting. When set to None, the
notch filter and AF generator 1 do not interact. When set to AFGen1
(coupled), the settings track each other unless the AF generator ’s
frequency is set outside the 300 Hz to 10 kHz limits of the notch filter.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
Nu m ber to Ca ll
This field is used enter the dialing sequence to be used whenever the
modem originates a call. The maximum number of characters is 36.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
Op t CDMA TB
This control is provided for future enhancements. It must be set to
Internaluntil options are available.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
P a r ity
This field specifies the serial communication parity setting when using
the serial ports.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When in remote mode (Remote Modefield is set to On), this field is
inaccessible.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
240
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
P a ssw or d
This field is used to enter the password needed to verify access for
incoming calls when the Incoming Call Securityfield is set to On.
The maximum number of characters is 8 characters (no spaces are
allowed).
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When you select this field a list of characters is displayed. Select the
characters for your password using the knob. Then select Done(from
the top of the list) when you are finished.
The password is case sensitive.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
P r in ter Ad r s
This field is used to select the GPIB address of the printer. This field is
displayed when the Printer Portfield is set to HP-IB.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
PRINTER CONFIGURE
P r in ter P or t
This field is used to select the port to which your printer is connected
(SERIAL 9, PARALLEL 15, HP-IB).
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
PRINTER CONFIGURE
P r in t Title
This field is used to enter up to 50 characters to be displayed at the top
of the printout.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
PRINTER CONFIGURE
Chapter 7
241
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Ra n ge Hold
These fields enable/disable several autoranging.
Auto Allenables these routines, providing automatic adjustment
when making AF or RF measurements.
Hold Alldisables these routines, requiring you to manually set the
affected settings.
The following fields are affected by the Range Holdfield:
• Input Attenin the RF ANALYZER and SPEC ANL screens.
• Gain Cntlin the AF ANALYZER screen. This field controls three
AF gain setting fields:
Input Gain
De-Emp Gain
Notch Gain
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The Hold Allsetting is primarily used when the instrument is
operated by remote control, such as in an automated test system.
Unless you have very specific reasons for disabling the automatic
functions, you should set this field to Auto Allwhen operating the
instrument manually.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
242
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Ref Select
This field selects the timebase reference signal to use for generating
and analyzing signals.
• Autoautomatically selects an external reference if a signal of
sufficient level is detected at the EXT REF IN.
• Internaluses the Test Set’s internal timebase and ignores signals
connected to the EXT REF IN connector.
• Externalrequires a valid reference signal to be connected to the
EXT REF IN connector.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The front-panel REFERNCE indicators show which source is selected
and whether or not the timebase is phase locked. The Test Set will not
operate correctly if it is unlocked.
Locking to an external reference may take several seconds. The lower
the frequency the longer it may take to lock to the signal.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
Rem ot e Mod e
This field is reserved for use with special software that enables remote
operation through a PC.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When remote mode is enabled, the information displayed on the CRT
will be mirrored and sent out over the SERIAL 11 port. The incoming
serial stream will be interpreted as escape-key sequences. Access to the
configuration fields for serial port 11 will be limited, but serial ports 9
and 10 will not be affected.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
Chapter 7
243
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Retr ies
This field sets the number of calls that will be tried before an
origination attempt is terminated. The total number of tries will be the
number entered in this field, plus one for the original attempt.
This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
RF Ch a n Std
Use the RF channel standard field to select the channel standard for
the radio-under-test. The RF generator ’s and the RF analyzer ’s
frequencies are automatically set to correspond to the channel number
entered in the RF Channelfield. RF Channelreplaces the RF Gen Freq
and Tune Freqfields on several screens when the RF Displayfield on
the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen is set to Chan.
Each standard has a prefix code that indicates what type of radio to
test; mobile station (MS) or land station (LS). For example, if you are
testing an AMPS base station, select LS AMPS.
For the NAMPS standards, a third letter is added indicating which
frequency band is used: upper, middle, or lower. For example, when
testing a base station using the upper band you would select
LSU NAMPS.
The USER-DEFselection is used to define your own channel
assignments. When selected, you enter the Base Freq, Chan Space,
and (Gen)-(Anl)settings.
For more information see the following related topics:
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The channel standard can also be changed in the lower subfield of the
RF Channelfield on the SPEC ANL, RF GENERATOR, and RF
ANALYZER screen.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
244
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
RF Disp la y
This field selects the format for entering the RF generator ’s and RF
analyzer ’s frequencies:
•
When Freqis selected, you enter the RF generator ’s and the RF
analyzer ’s frequencies directly using the keypad or knob.
•
When Chanis selected, the RF Gen Freqand Tune Freqfields on all
screens are replaced by the RF Channelfield, and only the channel
number is entered and displayed.
Channel tuning eliminates the need to enter transmit and receive
frequencies directly into the Test Set. Once your radio’s RF channel
standard is selected, you only have to enter the channel number to
automatically set the RF generator and RF analyzer to the correct
frequencies.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
RF Gen Volts
This field specifies whether you want RF voltages expressed as the
voltage across a 50 ohm load, or the open circuit voltage (emf).
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
This setting affects the RF generator’s and the tracking generator’s
amplitudes.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
Chapter 7
245
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
RF In /Ou t
This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the RF IN/OUT
port and the device-under-test.
•
Enter a positive value to indicate a gain (such as an amplifier gain).
When the RF IN/OUT port is used as an output, the RF generator’s
(or tracking generator’s) level is automatically set the specified
amount below what is indicated in the RF generator ’s Amplitude
field. Example; if this value is 10 dB, and the Amplitudefield shows
0 dBm, the actual level out of this port is −10 dBm.
When this port is used as an input, the TX Powermeasurement and
spectrum analyzer ’s marker level (Lvl) are automatically reduced by
that amount.
•
Enter a negative value to indicate a loss (such as cable loss). The RF
generator ’s (or tracking generator’s) level out this port is
automatically set that amount above what is indicated in the RF
generator ’s Amplitudefield.
When used as an input, the TX Powerand the spectrum analyzer ’s
marker level (Lvl) measurements are increased by that amount.
This field is only used when the RF Level Offsetfield is set to On.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
RF Level Offset
This field enables/disables the RF level offsets entered in the RF
In/Out, Duplex Out, and Antenna Infields below it.
•
When set to On, the RF generator ’s amplitude and RF analyzer ’s
power measurement are offset by the values entered in these fields.
•
When set to Off, the values in these fields are ignored.
For more information see the following related topics:
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
246
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
RF Offset
This field is displayed when the RF Displayfield is set to Freq.
This field enables/disables the RF generator − RF analyzer frequency
offset specified in the (Gen)-(Anl)field below it.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When an RF offset is used, changing the RF generator’s frequency or
RF analyzer ’s tune frequency automatically alters the other setting.
information.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
Sa ve/R eca ll
This field specifies which memory device the Test Set accesses when the
save and recall functions are used.
• Internalis a section of internal RAM. RAM is also used for running
IBASIC programs, which may require you to delete the save/recall
registers if the program is very large.
• Cardis the front-panel MEMORY CARD (PC card) slot. A
Save/Recall Device is not Present message is displayed if you
try to save or recall an instrument setup when a write-able PC card
is not installed in the Test Set.
• RAMrefers to RAM disks that you can create on internal RAM. Refer
to the Programmer ’s Guide for information on creating RAM disks.
This is part of the same memory used when “internal” is specified,
and may have to be erased when loading very large IBASIC
programs. A Save/Recall Device is not initializedmessage is
displayed if you try to save or recall an instrument setup when a
RAM disk has not been created.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
Chapter 7
247
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Ser ia l Ba u d
This field selects the baud rate for serial communications when using
the serial ports. Selecting this field displays a list of baud rate choices.
This setting is maintained after the instrument is turned off.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When in remote mode (Remote Modefield is set to On), this field is
inaccessible.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIUGRE
Ser ia l_9 In
This field selects the destination of characters received by the Test Set
on the SERIAL PORT 9.
• Instconfigures the serial port to connect to an external ASCII
terminal or computer to enter IBASIC programs, or to control the
Test Set using an external keyboard.
• IBASICis used to allow the IBASIC controller to read the serial port
while a program is running.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
If a serial printer is connected, the PRINT command causes the printer
to take control of the serial port until printing is done.
This setting is maintained after the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
Ser ia l No.
This field displays the serial number of the Test Set.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
248
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Ser ia l P or t
This field selects the serial port. The SERIAL 9 port must be used for
serial printing. SERIAL 11 is reserved for use with special software
that enables remote operation through a PC.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
MODEM CONFIGURE
Sta tu s
This field indicates the status of the modem connection.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connected
Idle
Waiting
Dialing
Authenticating
Disconnecting
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
MODEM CONFIGURE
Stop Len gth
This field specifies the number of stop bits (1 or 2) used for serial
communications when using the serial port.
This setting is maintained after the instrument is turned off.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When in remote mode (Remote Modefield is set to On), this field is
inaccessible.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
I/O CONFIGURE
Chapter 7
249
Configuration - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields on the Configuration Screens
Tim e
This field sets the time-of-day for the instrument’s 24 hour clock.
(Example, 4:53 PM is entered 16:53)
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The internal clock still functions when the instrument is turned off.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
Tota l R AM
This field displays the total amount of RAM available for IBASIC
programs and save/recall registers.
Scr een (s) Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
250
Chapter 7
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Cnfgscrn.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Signaling Encoder and Decoder Screens
Sign a lin g E n cod er a n d Decod er Scr een s
Th e Decod er ’s Sign a l Sou r ce
The decoder always gets its signal immediately after the de-emphasis
network of the AF analyzer. De-emphasis can be turned on or off on the
AF ANALYZER screen, or can be controlled while using the decoder by
assigning a global USER key to the De-Emphasisfield.
Decod er F r equ en cy Mea su r em en t s
The decoder uses a different timebase for frequency counting than the
AF Analyzer. Therefore, their measurements may be different when
measuring the same signal (by a very small amount).
Th e En cod er
The encoder’s uses AF Generator 2 to generate its signals. The
available signaling formats are AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS, DTMF,
and a function (waveform) generator.
252
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS Encoder and Decoder
AMP S-TACS, NAMP S-NTACS En cod er a n d
Decod er
The following signaling formats are available for this decoder.
•
•
•
•
•
AMPS = Advanced Mobile Phone Service.
NAMPS = Narrowband Advanced Mobile Phone Service.
TACS = Total Access Communications Systems.
J TACS = Total Access Communications System for J apan.
NTACS = Narrowband Total Access Communications Systems
(NTACS is an extension of J TACS).
The theory and applications of cellular telephone systems are
beyond the scope of this manual. If additional information is needed,
refer to the many technical manuals available on the subject of
cellular telephones.
Con tr ol a n d Voice Ch a n n el Id en tifier s
The AMPS/TACS and NAMPS/NTACS encoder modes use the same
forward control channel (FOCC) settings and output format. However,
the forward voice channel (FVC) information is different.
The control and voice channel fields are available in separate menus.
The Channelfield is used to select the Cntl(FOCC) or Voice(FVC)
menu.
Fields available only in the forward control channel menu have (FOCC)
printed in the field title.
Fields available only in the forward voice channel menu have (FVC)
printed in the field title.
En cod er /Decod er In ter a ction
The AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS encoder acts like a base station
transmitter, creating forward control and voice channel information
(FOCC/FVC). The AMPS-NAMPS-TACS/NTACS decoder acts like a
base station receiver, analyzing reverse control and voice channel
signals (RECC/RVC).
The decoder uses the encoder’s Data Ratesetting to specify how fast
the incoming message is being sent. Therefore, when using the decoder,
you must first specify the data rate in the encoder.
Chapter 8
253
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS Encoder and Decoder
AMP S-TACS, NAMP S-NTACS Decod er
The AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS decoder acts like a base station
receiver by analyzing Reverse Control Channel (RECC) and Reverse
Voice Channel (RVC) message streams for various cellular telephone
formats.
The decoder can also be used to analyze Forward Control Channel
(FOCC) and Forward Voice Channel (FVC) data from the base station.
Decod er Mod e Differ en ces
The AMPS-TACS and NAMPS-NTACS decoder modes are essentially
the same for analyzing reverse control channel (RECC) information.
However, the voice channel (RVC) information for NAMPS-NTACS is
displayed differently than AMPS-TACS information. Fields and decoder
measurements that are only used for either mode are noted in their
descriptions.
In ter p r etin g Decod ed Da ta
RE CC a n d AMP S-TACS RVC Mea su r em en ts
After being armed, the measurement begins when the last bit of Word
Sync has been received. The Gate Timefield specifies the measurement
period for all RECC measurements and the AMPS-TACS RVC
measurement.
The received bits are displayed as hexadecimal (hex) characters. If the
last bits received do not complete the last hex character, the received
bits are used as the most significant bits in the character, and the
remaining bit positions are filled with zeros.
For example; if the last bits received are “01”, two zeros are added to
the right to produce the binary number 0100. The hexadecimal
equivalent, 4, is displayed.
The first two hex characters of the RECC data displayed contain the
7-bit Digital Color Code of the Seizure Precursor. The characters are
right-justified so the farthest bit to the left for the first hex character is
always 0. The first word of the RECC message begins in the third hex
character of the displayed data.
All bits of the RECC and RVC data streams received after the initial
Word Sync are displayed, including Parity and additional Dotting and
Word Sync sequences.
The decoder does not check for any errors in the received data stream.
254
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS Encoder and Decoder
F igu r e 8-1
Decod in g t h e R ever se Con t r ol Ch a n n el (RE CC) Da t a
amps-de2.wmf
F igu r e 8-2
Decod in g t h e AMP S-TACS R ever se Voice Ch a n n el (RVC) Da t a
amps-de3.wmf
Chapter 8
255
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
AMPS-TACS, NAMPS-NTACS Encoder and Decoder
NAMP S-NTACS Rever se Voice Ch a n n el Mea su r em en t s
Three types of RVC information can be decoded; selected using the
F igu r e 8-3
Mea su r e F ield
• DSATdisplays the 6-digit DSAT (Digital Supervisory Audio Tone) or
DST (Digital Signaling Tone) number, depending on the type of
signal being received. If the received number is not one of the 14
standard combinations (7 DSAT or 7 DST), the decoder displays a
constantly changing number until one of the standard values is
Datadisplays the 36 message bits and 12 parity bits of the RVC
message. The measurement begins when the last sync word bit is
received, and ends after the last parity bit is received. The
measurement is re-triggered when the next sync word is received:
DTMFdisplays Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency tone pair frequencies and
on/off times. These are tones that may be used to trigger connected
equipment after a mobile-to-base station connection has been made
256
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
DTMF Sequence Encoder and Decoder
DTMF Seq u en ce E n cod er a n d Decod er
The DTMF sequence encoder creates dual-tone multi-frequency tone
sequences of variable frequency, amplitude, and duration. It’s signal
can be used to modulate the RF generator, or it can be output through
the AUDIO OUT connector.
The DTMF sequence decoder analyzes dual-tone multi-frequency tone
sequences and displays the associated parameters.
Mea su r em en t Lim its
Lo Tone:680 - 960 Hz
Hi Tone:1190 - 1660 Hz
Actual limits are typically slightly wider than this. However, the
crossover point between Hi and Lo tone decoding is approximately 1.1
kHz. If incoming tones approach this point, unreliable measurements
may be displayed (frequency measurement errors and spurious off
times).
258
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Function Generator Encoder and Decoder
F u n ction Gen er a tor E n cod er a n d Decod er
The function generator provides single-tone audio frequency signals of
various waveforms, amplitudes, and frequencies. Its signal can be used
to modulate the RF generator, or it can be output through the AUDIO
OUT connector.
Decod in g Con sid er a tion s
Frequency measurements are affected by the Filter1, Filter2,
Settling, and De-Emphasissettings in the AF ANALYZER screen.
Four dashes (- - - -) are displayed if the incoming signal is out of range,
or if the Gate Timeis too long for the frequency being measured.
Chapter 8
259
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Con tr ol F ield s for th e Sign a lin g En cod er a n d
Decod er
AF An l In
AF Gen 2 To
Ar m Mea s
Arm measurement prepares the decoder to be triggered by an incoming
signal when Singleis selected. When selected, the Status:field
indicates Armed.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (All Modes)
B/I Dela y
Busy/idle delay determines the number of bits that are counted before a
busy/idle bit changes from the Idle state to the busy state. This function
is used with the WS Delayand 1stBitDlysettings in the Busy/Idle
field.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
Bu r sts
This field defines the number of times the message data is output when
Sendis selected. This function only works when the Send Modefield is
set to Burst.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC, DTMF)
260
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Bu sy/Id le
This field selects the busy/idle status information to be included in the
signaling sequence.
• Idlesets the busy/idle bits of the forward control channel
information to indicate an idle state.
• Busysets the busy/idle bits of the forward control channel
information to indicate a busy state.
• WS Delay, word sync delay, prevents a busy/idle change until the
word sync information has been received and a defined number of
delay bits has been counted. The delay bit value is set in the B/I
Delayfield.
• 1stBitDly, first bit delay causes the busy/idle bit to be set after a bit
has been received and a defined number of delay bits has been
counted. The delay bit value is set in the B/I Delayfield.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
Ch a n n el
For the Signaling Decoder this field selects the type of data to decode:
Reverse Control Channel (Cntl), or Reverse Voice Channel (Voice).
For the Signaling Encoder this field selects the forward control channel
(FOCC) or forward voice control (FVC) menus.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
Da ta (h ex)
This display field lists the decoded data serially as it is received. This
field is labeled RECC Data (hex)for the NAMPS-NTACS mode, but
performs the same function.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
Chapter 8
261
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Da ta Level
This setting determines the signal level change that occurs when a
logical high (1) or low (0) is output. The unit-of-measure used depends
on the AFGen2 Tosetting. The direction of the output level change
depends on the Polaritysetting.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
Da ta R a te (a n a log)
Sign a lin g Decod er
This measurement field displays the data rate in bits-per-second for the
data stream being received.
The encoder screen’s Data Rate field tells the decoder how fast the
incoming message is being sent. Set the Data Ratefield’s value before
using the AMPS-TACS or NAMPS-NTACS decoder.
Sign a lin g E n cod er
This field specifies how fast the data stream is output in
bits-per-second.
This setting is also used to determine the turn off code frequency (TOC
frequency Hz = Data Rate in bps). Example: 1000 bps = 1 kHz
This field specifies the data rate for the signal being decoded, and must
be set before using the AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTACS decoder.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
262
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
DSAT
The signaling encoder ’s DSAT: field is displayed only when the Mode
field is set to NAMP-NTACand the Channelfield is set to Voice.
This field is used to set one of the 7 valid DSAT sequences to be used on
the designated voice channel.
DSAT is output continuously when Send DSATis selected, and is only
stopped when Stop DSATis selected. If message or DST information is
sent using Send, the DSAT signal is temporarily interrupted until that
information has been sent.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: NAMP-NTAC)
DSAT/DST (h ex)
The DSAT/DST (hex)field is displayed only when the Modefield is set
to NAMP-NTACand the Channelfield is set to Voice.
The DSAT/DST field displays the received DSAT/DSTsequence. The
received sequence is displayed in hexadecimal and can be checked
against the DSAT value displayed in the DSAT right-hand DSAT field.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: NAMP-NTAC)
Chapter 8
263
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
F iller (F OCC)
F igu r e 8-5
The data you enter here............
FOCC
Stream B
Filler
Stream A
Filler
Message
Message
T
T
2
Parity
Parity
1
T
T
2
1
Information
(26 Bits)
(2 Bits)
(12 Bits)
Contents of the Message or Filler Field
WORD B
WORD A
...........is output in this sequence.
10 Bits
11 Bits
WORD
40 Bits
40 Bits
40 Bits
REPEAT 1
OF
REPEAT 1
OF
REPEAT 2
OF
DOTTING
WORD A
WORD B
WORD A
SYNC
Busy/Idle Bits
40 Bits
40 Bits
40 Bits
10 Bits
DOTTING
REPEAT 1
OF
REPEAT 1
OF
REPEAT 1
OF
WORD A
WORD B
WORD B
Each Fillerfield contains 7 hexadecimal characters representing the 2
type bits and 26 information bits of the control filler/message word. The
dotting, word sync, and parity bits are generated automatically.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The control filler is sent continuously when Send Filleris selected, or
after a control message has been sent using Send. The control message
is stopped whenever Stop Filler, Filler, Channel, Data Rate,
Polarity, or AFGen2 Tois selected.
Both filler fields must be full (seven digits) for the forward control
channel information to be structured correctly. Do not leave any blank
spaces.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
264
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
F r equ en cy
This measurement displays the decoded signal’s frequency.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: Func Gen)
Ga te Tim e
This field specifies how long the decoder analyzes a signal after it has
been triggered. Up to 65 seconds of gate time can be specified. The gate
time should be set long enough to allow the preamble and all necessary
data bits to be captured.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
If the gate time is too long, the decoder ’s data buffer becomes full. A
message is displayed instructing you to decrease the gate time.
This function is not used with the NAMPS-NTACS RVC decoder.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (All Modes)
Hi Ton e
This for the high frequency tone in each tone pair. The measurement
type is selected by selecting the Freqfield to display a list of
measurement choices.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Frequency error is calculated by comparing the DTMF encoder ’s
frequency settings for each tone pair with the decoded frequencies.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: DTMF)
Chapter 8
265
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
In p u t Level
This field specifies the expected data signal level (after de- emphasis if
used). The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer, the
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The unit-of-measure is determined by the AF Anl Insetting.
The input level should be set high enough to prevent false triggering,
but low enough to allow triggering for valid signals (typically about 3
kHz). This you to set the input level well below the expected level.
When using de-emphasis, the Input Levelsetting may need to be
reduced significantly to properly decode the incoming signal.
De-Emphasis is enabled/disabled using the De-Emphasisfield on the
AF ANALYZER screen.
If de-emphasis is used (by setting the AF Analyzer ’s De-Emphasisfield
to 750 µs), the Input Levelshould be set to about 1/5 of the measured
signal’s level. For example, a 1 kHz, 1 Vpeak sinewave into the AF
Analyzer ’s input requires an Input Levelof approximately 0.212 V to
trigger correctly.
De-em p h a sis E ffect s on In p u t Level
De-emphasis is a single-pole, low-pass filter with a 212.2 Hz corner
frequency. It is enabled/disabled using the De-Emphasisfield on the AF
ANALYZER screen. The input level is the expected level at the output
of the de-emphasis network.
Assuming a mean DTMF frequency of approximately 1 kHz, decoding
with de-emphasis on (set to
750 µs) requires the input level to be set to 212/1000 = 0.212 times the
peak deviation, or about 1/5 the incoming level of the tone.
266
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Exa m p les of In p u t Level Set t in gs
Exa m p le 8-1
Exa m p le 8-2
Exa m p le 1
Peak deviation 3 kHz, De-emphasis off. Set the input level to 3 kHz.
Exa m p le 2
Peak deviation 3 kHz, De-emphasis 750 ms. Set the input level to 3 ×
0.212 = 636 Hz
See Also
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (All Modes)
Lo Ton e
This measurement field lists the frequency or frequency error for the
low frequency tone in each tone pair. The measurement type is selected
by selecting the Freqfield to display a list of measurement choices.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Frequency error is calculated by comparing the DTMF Encoder ’s
frequency settings for each tone pair with the decoded frequencies.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: DTMF)
Mea su r e
This field is only displayed when the Channelfield is set to Voice. This
field selects the type of decoded data to display: DSAT or DST codes,
message data (Data), or DTMF (Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency) tone data.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: NAMP-NTAC)
Chapter 8
267
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Messa ge (F OCC)
F igu r e 8-6
AMP S-TACS/NAMP S-NTACS F OCC Messa ge a n d F iller Da t a
F or m a t
The data you enter here............
FOCC
Stream B
Filler
Stream A
Filler
Message
Message
T
T
2
Parity
Parity
1
T
T
2
1
Information
(26 Bits)
(2 Bits)
(12 Bits)
Contents of the Message or Filler Field
WORD B
WORD A
...........is output in this sequence.
10 Bits
11 Bits
WORD
40 Bits
40 Bits
40 Bits
REPEAT 1
OF
REPEAT 1
OF
REPEAT 2
OF
DOTTING
WORD A
WORD B
WORD A
SYNC
Busy/Idle Bits
40 Bits
40 Bits
40 Bits
10 Bits
DOTTING
REPEAT 4
OF
REPEAT 5
OF
REPEAT 5
OF
WORD A
WORD B
WORD B
Message streams A and B specify various forward control channel
parameters.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Like the filler information, the message information can only be input
in full (seven digit) lines. Also, message streams A and B must have the
same number of lines in them.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
268
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Messa ge (F VC) (AMP S-TACS)
F igu r e 8-7
AMP S-TACS F VC Messa ge Da t a Ou t p u t F or m a t
The data you enter here............
F V C
Parity
(12 Bits)
T
T
Message
Information
(26 Bits)
2
1
(2 Bits)
Contents of the Message or Field
Message Word
.........is output in this sequence
101 Bits
11 Bits
40 Bits
11 Bits 40 Bits
37 Bits
REPEAT 1
OF
WORD
REPEAT 2
W.S.
OF
DOTTING
DOTTING
W.S.
WORD
W.S.=Word Sync
11 Bits
11 Bits
37 Bits
11 Bits
W.S.
40 Bits
40 Bits
37 Bits
37 Bits
40 Bits
REPEAT 9
OF
REPEAT 10
OF
REPEAT 11
OF
W.S.
W.S.
D O TTIN G
DOTTING
DOTTING
WORD
WORD
WORD
This description applies to the AMPS-TACS mode.
The 7 hexadecimal characters of the FVC Messagefield represent the 2
type bits and 26 information bits in the FVC message word.
The generation of dotting, word sync, parity, and the 11 repetitions of
these parameters in the FVC message stream is done automatically.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The entire field must contain data, no blank spaces are allowed. SAT is
turned off while the FVC message stream is being sent.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS)
Chapter 8
269
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Messa ge (F VC) (NAMP S-TACS)
F igu r e 8-8
NAMP S-NTACS F VC Messa ge Da t a ou t p u t F or m a t
FVC
Message
1234567
DSAT
2556B
Send
DSAT
24-bits
DSAT
24-bits
DSAT
24-bits
DSAT
24-bits
Message Info
28--bits
Parity
12-bits
Sync word
30-bits
Data Direction
This description applies to the NAMP-NTAC mode.
The 7 hexadecimal characters (28 bits) of this FVC message are
combined with 12 parity bits calculated by the encoder to output a
40-character data stream. This information is output when the
Message/DSTfield is set to Message, and Sendis selected.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The entire field must contain data, no blank spaces are allowed. DSAT
is turned off while the FVC Message Stream is being sent.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: NAMP-NTAC)
Messa ge/DST (F VC)
This field is available only in NAMP-NTAC mode.
This field determines what type of data is sent when Sendis selected:
1. Selecting Messagecauses the contents of the Messagefield to be
output.
2. Selecting DSTcauses the digital signaling tone sequence to be
output. The sequence sent is the inverse of the sequence entered in
the DSATfield, and is automatically determined by the Encoder.
The DST values are: DAA934, DAA4D4, DA9564, DA52B2, D954D4,
D94D52, and D69654.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: NAMP-NTAC)
270
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Mod e
This field is used to choose which of the Test Set’s Decoder screens to
display.
Func Gen
DTMF
AMPS-TACS
NAMP-NTAC
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (All Modes)
SIGNALING ENCODER (All Modes)
Nu m of Bits
This field lists the total number of bits displayed. This number is
dependent on Data Rate of the signal being decoded, the Gate Timeof
the decoder, and the size of the decoder ’s data buffer.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The buffer has a maximum capacity of:
•
•
1584 bits for decoding Reverse Voice Channel (RVC) data streams.
1583 bits for decoding Reverse Control Channel (RECC) data
streams.
This measurement is not available for NAMPS-NTACS RVC decoding.
See Also
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
Off Tim e
For the encoder, this field sets the length of time each DTMF tones is off
during the sequence.
For the decoder, this measurement column lists the length of time each
tone is “off” prior to the next tone being received.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: DTMF)
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: DTMF)
Chapter 8
271
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
On Tim e
For the encoder, this field sets the length of time each DTMF tone is on
during the sequence.
For the decoder, this measurement column lists the length of time each
tone is on during the sequence.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: DTMF)
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: DTMF)
P ola r it y
This field is used to match the polarity of the encoded signal being
analyzed.
This function is helpful to restore the proper data polarity when the
transmitter, repeater, or receiver used in your communications system
has an odd number of inversions; causing the received data to be
inverted when decoded. (This is common when a signal is translated to
a lower frequency using an LO whose frequency is higher than the
signal’s frequency; or when inverting amplifiers are used.)
Nor m a l Op er a t ion
When this field is set to Norm, a logical high (1) is displayed when a
positive peak in the received signal is detected. A negative peak
displays a logical low (0).
In ver t ed Op er a t ion
When this field is set to Invert, a logical low (0) is displayed when a
positive peak in the received signal is detected. A negative peak
displays a logical high (1).
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Inverting amplifiers used in transmitters, receivers, and repeaters can
cause an inversion of the modulating digital data. If the decoded signal
does not display the expected results, change this field’s setting to see if
the signal may be getting inverted before being decoded.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
272
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
P r e-Em p
This field determines whether the encoder ’s signal passes through or
bypasses the 750 ms pre-emphasis network. Pre-emphasis may be
required when testing some FM receivers.
Pre-emphasis, when used, attenuates the lower frequency tone
(1200 Hz at 1200 bps) to 2/3 of the AF Gen2 Tofield level setting.
See Also
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: DTMF)
RECC Da ta (h ex)
This display field lists the decoded data serially as it is received. This is
the same information that the AMPS-TACS Data (hex)measurement
displays.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
SAT F r eq (F VC)
This field is available only in AMPS-TACS mode.
This field sets the supervisory audio tone’s frequency. This signal is sent
continuously whenever the FVC is selected, except while the Message is
being sent.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
SAT Level (F VC)
This field sets the supervisory audio tone’s level. The unit-of-measure
depends on the AFGen2 Tosetting.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
SAT is turned off while the FVC message stream is being sent.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
Chapter 8
273
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Sen d
Selecting this field causes the FVC or FOCC message to be output.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
When sending an FOCC message stream, the contents of the Filler
are continuously output after the message data has been sent. Stop
Filleris used to stop the output.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC, DTMF)
Sen d DSAT (F VC)
This field is available only in NAMP-NTAC mode.
Selecting this field causes the contents (24 bits) of the DSATfield to be
continuously output until Stop DSATis selected. If a message or DST is
sent by selecting Send, the DSAT data is output continuously afterthe
message is output.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
Sen d F iller (F OCC)
Selecting this field causes the contents of the Fillerfields for Stream
A and Stream B to be output. The fillers continue to be output until
Stop Filleris selected.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
274
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Sen d Mod e
This field selects the mode used when Sendis selected to output the
message.
• Singleoutputs the entire message once.
• Burstoutputs the Message the number of times specified in the
Burstsfield.
• Contcauses the message to be output continuously until Stopis
selected.
• Stepis not used in the AMPS-TACS mode.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC, DTMF)
Sin e Un its
This field specifies whether the signal’s output is in units of rms or
peak. This field is only present when the AFGen2 Tofield is set to Audio
Out.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: Func Gen)
Sin gle/Con t
This field specifies how long you want the analyzer to decode incoming
signals:
• Singletells the analyzer to display the information received during
one Gate Time. Measurements are displayed until Arm Measis
selected again.
• Contis used to automatically re-arm the analyzer and display the
measurements on a continual basis until Singleis selected.
Previous measurement results are over-written by subsequent
measurements.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
To dis-arm the decoder in single mode, select the Stop Measfield. The
Stop Meas function is disabled when Contis selected.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (All Modes)
Chapter 8
275
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Sta n d a r d
This field specifies the standard for the signal being tested.
Decod er Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
This setting alters the decoder ’s function by specifying the expected
frame structure and channel range for the incoming signal.
Trying to run a test with the wrong standard selected will result in
incorrect decoded data, or will display an operating error message.
En cod er Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
Each standard affects the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
The types of frames that can be sent.
The range of valid channel numbers.
The encoding of the frame data.
The interpretation of received frames.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC, DTMF)
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC, DTMF)
Sta tu s
This field indicates what the encoder or decoder is doing.
• Idleis displayed when no data is being sent.
• Controlis displayed when control channel data is being output.
• Workingis displayed when a handshake has been performed and
working channel data is being sent.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC, DTMF)
SIGNALING DECODER (All Modes)
Stop
Selecting this field stops the data stream being output when the Send
Modeis set to Contor Burst. After this field is selected, the current
repetition of the data stream is finished, and the turn-off code is output.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC, DTMF)
276
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Stop DSAT (F VC)
This field is available only in NAMP-NTAC mode.
Selecting this field stops the digital supervisory audio tone.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: NAMP-NTAC)
Stop F iller (F OCC)
Selecting this field stops the Fillerinformation from being output
after Send Filleror Sendis used.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
Stop Mea s
This field is used to disarm the decoder when making single
measurements (encoder Send Modeis set to Single). It is not used
when making continuous (Cont) measurements.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: All Modes)
Sym
The symbol column corresponds to the DTMF decoder ’s symbols
assigned for each tone. As each tone pair is analyzed, the corresponding
symbol is listed in this column.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
The symbol assigned to a received tone is based on the closest symbol
frequency to that pair.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: DTMF)
Sym bol F r equ en cies (Hz)
The eight column/row frequencies are automatically entered by the
Standardfield setting. You can change the frequency values using the
DATA keys.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: DTMF)
Chapter 8
277
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Tr igger P a tter n (bin )
This field allows you to enter a specific bit pattern to filter displayed
information. The decoder only displays the received data when this
binary pattern is encountered immediately after triggering. This is
helpful when you only want to display messages containing very
specific information.
The trigger pattern is entered as a sequence of ones, zeros, and dots. A
dot will cause the decoder to trigger for either a one or a zero in that bit
position in the received data stream.
Op er a t in g Con sid er a t ion s
This function is not available for decoding NAMPS-NTACS RVC
information.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC)
Tr ig Level
The trigger level indicates the minimum signal level required to begin a
measurement that has been “armed.” The level is adjusted by changing
the Input Levelfield’s setting.
The input level should be set high enough to prevent false triggering,
but low enough to allow triggering for valid signals. This may require
you to set the input level well below the expected level.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING DECODER (Modes: AMPS-TACS, NAMP-NTAC, Func
Gen)
278
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Tw ist
Twist is the ratio of amplitudes (in dB) between the high frequency and
low frequency tone in each DTMF pair. A positive value indicates a
higher amplitude for the high frequency tones. A negative value
indicates a higher amplitude for the low frequency tones.
The amplitude of the combined tones is set in the AFGen2 Tofield.
Tw ist a n d P r e-em p h a sis In t er a ct ion
Twist and Pre-emphasis affect the relative levels of the high and low
tones within each symbol (tone pair). If pre-emphasis is off, twist sets
the difference in deviation (in dB) between the high and low tones. If
twist is off, pre-emphasis places a 6 dB per octave difference in
deviation between the high and low tones. If both twist and
pre-emphasis are on, the two effects are summed.
For most conditions, set Twistto 2.5 dB, Pre-Empon, and 60% rated
deviation (3 kHz for a typical 5 kHz deviation rated receiver).
Exa m p les of Tw ist a n d P r e-em p h a sis In t er a ct ion
Exa m p le 8-3
Exa m p le 8-4
Exa m p le 1:
3 kHz deviation, Twist 0 dB, Pre-emphasis off.
The level of each low tone and high tone individually generate 1.5 kHz
deviation. The tones are summed to produce 3 kHz deviation.
Exa m p le 2:
3 kHz deviation, Twist 2.5 dB, Pre-emphasis off.
The high tone has 2.5 dB (a factor of 1.334) more deviation than the low
tone. The two tones are summed to produce 3 kHz peak deviation.
Therefore, the low tone’s deviation is 1286 Hz and the high tone’s
deviation is 1714 Hz.
Exa m p le 8-5
Exa m p le 3:
3 kHz deviation, Twist 0 dB, Pre-emphasis on.
There is a 6 dB per octave difference between the high and low tones.
For example, if sending a 1, which has a low tone of 697 Hz and a high
tone of
1209 Hz, the high tone has a deviation of 1209/697 = 1.735 times the
low tone’s deviation. The high tone’s deviation is then 20 ×
log(1209/967) = 4.78 dB higher than the low tone. Since their sum must
equal 3 kHz, the low tone’s deviation is 1097 Hz, and the high tone’s
deviation is 1903 Hz.
Chapter 8
279
Signaling Encoder and Decoder - Screens and Control Fields
Control Fields for the Signaling Encoder and Decoder
Exa m p le 8-6
Exa m p le 4:
3 kHz deviation, Twist 2.5 dB, Pre-emphasis on.
If sending a 1 (697 Hz low tone and 1209 Hz high tone), the high tone’s
Since the peak deviation of their sum is 3 kHz, the low tone’s deviation
is 905.5 Hz and the high tone’s deviation is 2094.5 Hz.
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: DTMF)
Wa vefor m
This field selects the desired waveform for AF Generator 2. The
available waveforms are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sine wave
Square wave
Triangle wave
Ramp (positive-going and negative-going)
DC±
Universal Noise
Gaussian Noise
Scr een s Wh er e F ield is P r esen t
SIGNALING ENCODER (Modes: Func Gen)
280
Chapter 8
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Enc-dec.fm
Connectors
Connectors
Con n ect or s
10 MHz REF OUT
This connector furnishes a 10 MHz reference for external instruments.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
Waveform = sinewave
Output frequency = 10 MHz
Output level >0.5 V rms
Output impedance approximately 50 Ω.
NOTE
The reference output frequency is always 10 MHz, independent of the selected input
reference frequency.
16 × CHIP CLOCK 19.6608 MHz OUT
This output provides a 19.6608 MHz (16 times the CDMA chip rate) square wave with a
60% duty cycle. This signal comes from the CDMA frame clocks.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
Nominal output level = TTL
Output impedance = 50 Ω
ANALOG MODULATION IN
This connector provides an external modulation connection to the RF generator.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
The Mod In Tofield of the RF GENERATOR screen sets the type of modulation (AM or
FM).
The FM Couplingfield on the RF GENERATOR screen selects ac or dc coupling of this
signal for FM operation.
282
Chapter 9
Connectors
Connectors
ANT IN
The antenna input is used for analyzing low-power RF signals (≤60 mW), and is typically
used for off-the-air measurements. This port can be selected in the RF ANALYZER,
SPEC ANL, CDMA ANALYZER, or CODE DOM screens.
CAUTION
Connecting a signal of >60 mW (17.78 dBm) to the ANT IN port can cause instrument
damage (although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short-duration
signal of several Watts).
If the overpower circuit is triggered (signified by a warning message at the top of the
screen), remove the signal from the ANT IN port, and reset using Meas Reset (press and
release the Shift key, then the Hold key) or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
Input impedance = 50 Ω
TX power cannot be measured using this port; use the RF IN/OUT port. However, low
power levels can be measured using this port with the spectrum analyzer.
Additional sensitivity for this port is available using the Sensitivityfield in the RF
ANALYZER and SPEC ANL screens.
283
Chapter 9
Connectors
Connectors
AUDIO IN
Two connectors are used to input audio signals to the AF analyzer:
•
•
HI is the main audio signal input connection.
LO is used for the audio signal reference. Three choices are available using the AF
ANALYZER screen’s Audio In Lofield:
• Gndconnects the center pin through approximately 100 Ω to chassis ground.
• Floatis a floating input.
• 600 To Hi provides a 600 Ω internal load to match an audio source with an
output impedance of 600 Ω.
The measured level is the potential between the HI and LO center pins. The shells of
both connectors are at chassis ground.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
Input impedance is switchable between 1 M Ω
in parallel with 95 pF, or 600 Ω
floating.
This port is selected as the AF analyzer’s input using the AF Anl Infield on the AF
ANALYZER screen.
Signals input to the AF analyzer are routed through different filters, amplifiers, and
detectors that affect the displayed measurement.
CAUTION
The maximum level between the HI and LO center pins is 42 V peak (approximately 30
Vrms). Exceeding this value can cause permanent instrument damage.
284
Chapter 9
Connectors
Connectors
AUDIO OUT
This port is used to output signals from audio frequency generators 1 and 2.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
The output level is set by the AF generators and is not affected by the front-panel
VOLUME control.
Output impedance <1 Ω
Maximum output current = 20 mA peak
Maximum reverse voltage = 12 V peak
AC/DC coupling is selected using the Audio Outfield. This field is available on the RF
GENERATOR screen.
BASEBAND OUT (I a n d Q)
These outputs provide buffered versions of the I and Q drive signals.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
The I and Q drive signals are balanced by DACs that provide the correct dc offset for the
I/Q modulator.
Output impedance = 50 Ω
Nominal output level = 250 mV (open circuit)
Frequency = approximately 600 kHz
Ch a ssis Gr ou n d
The chassis ground terminal provides a general chassis connection.
CHIP CLOCK 1.2288 MHz OUT
This output provides a 1.2288 MHz (CDMA chip rate) square wave with a 50% duty
cycle. This signal comes from the CDMA frame clocks.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
Nominal output level = TTL
Output impedance = 50 Ω
285
Chapter 9
Connectors
Connectors
DATA IN
This connector provides a data input to the CDMA generator.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
Input level = TTL
Input impedance = 50k Ω
Data Rate = 1.2288 Mcps
DUP LEX OUT
This connector is an output for the RF generator, CDMA generator and tracking
generator.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
Output impedance = 50 Ω
The RF generator ’s output is selected in the Output Portfield. This field is available on
the RF GENERATOR, CDMA GENERATOR, and SPEC ANL screens.
CAUTION
Connecting a signal of >60 mW (17.78 dBm) to the DUPLEX OUT port can cause
instrument damage (although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a
short-duration signal of several Watts).
If the overpower circuit is triggered (signified by a warning message at the top of the
screen), remove the signal from the DUPLEX OUT port, and reset using Meas Reset
(press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key) or turn the Test Set off and on to reset
it.
EVEN SECOND SYNC IN
This port is an input for the even second clock from the base station under test. A
positive edge on this connector starts two timers. One timer, after reaching terminal
counts, starts CDMA frame clocks. The other timer starts pilot PN sequence generation.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
Input impedance = 50 kΩ
Input level range = TTL
286
Chapter 9
Connectors
Connectors
EXT RE F IN
This connector allows you to input an external reference. The reference frequency is
selected using the Ext Ref Infield on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE screen.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
Input frequency = 1, 2, 5, 10, or 15 MHz; 1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, or 16x chip
Input level >0.15 V rms
Input impedance approximately 50Ω.
When a valid signal is applied to the EXT REF IN port, the Test Set automatically
switches from internal to external reference if the Ref Selectfield is set to Auto.
This signal is used as a reference for, and directly affects, these functions:
RF Generator Frequency (including the Tracking Generator)
RF Frequency Counter
AF Frequency Counter
RF Analyzer Tune Frequency
Spectrum Analyzer Center Frequency
CDMA Generator Frequency
CDMA Analyzer Frequency
AF generators 1 and 2 are not affected using an external reference; they use their own
reference.
NOTE
The reference output frequency is always 10 MHz, independent of the selected input
reference frequency.
Electrostatic discharges to the EXT REF IN port of 0.5 kV or above may cause
degradation of performance requiring operator intervention.
287
Chapter 9
Connectors
Connectors
EXT SCOP E TRIG IN
This connector provides an external oscilloscope’s trigger input.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
Input threshold approximately 2.5 V
Maximum Input level approximately 20 V peak
Input impedance is:
•
•
100 k Ω for signals ≤ 5.6 V peak
5 k Ω for signals >5.6 V peak
When measured with no load on the input, a 5Volt level is present on the connector due
to the internal pull-up resistor design.
F RAME CLOCK OUT
This output provides an external connection to several internal clocks. The clocks are
selected using the Frame Clock Outputfield on the INSTRUMENT CONFIGURE
screen. The frame clock selections are as follows:
•
•
•
•
20.00 ms
26.67 ms
80.00 ms
2.00 s
GP IB
This connector allows communication between the Test Set and other instruments or
computers using the GPIB Interface Bus.
MEMORY CAR D Slot
This front-panel opening is where PC cards are inserted.
288
Chapter 9
Connectors
Connectors
PARALLEL 15
This port is used with printers requiring a parallel interface when printing screen
images or test results. Set the Printer Port:field (on the PRINTER CONFIGURE
screen or TESTS (Printer Setup) screen) to Parallelto print to this port. Use address
PARALLEL_15 when sending data to this port from IBASIC programs.
Pin numbers are embossed on the connector. Pin assignments are as follows:
F igu r e 9-1
P a r a llel P or t P in Assign m en ts
Pin 1
Pin 14
nStrobe
Data 1 (LSB)
Data 2
nAutoFD
nFault
nInit
nSelectIn
Data 3
Data 4
Signal Ground (nStrobe)
Signal Ground (Data 1 and Data 2)
Signal Ground (Data 3 and Data 5)
Signal Ground (Data 5 and Data 6)
Signal Ground (Data 7 and Data 8)
Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)
Signal Ground (PError, Select, and nAck)
Signal Ground (nAutoFD, nSelectIn, and nInit)
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Data 8 (MSB)
nAck
Busy
PError
Select
Pin 13
Pin 25
PAR ALLEL 16
PARALLEL PORT 16 is reserved for future enhancements.
289
Chapter 9
Connectors
Connectors
RF IN/OUT
This Type-N connection is used to output signals from the RF generator and to input RF
signals.
CAUTION
Overpower Damage — Refer to the Test Set’s connector panel for maximum input power
level. Exceeding this level can cause permanent instrument damage.
If the RF power at the RF IN/OUT port exceeds allowable limits, a loud warning signal
sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen. If this occurs, disconnect the RF
power, reset using Meas Reset (press and release the Shift key, then the Hold key), and
allow the Test Set to cool off for approximately 2 minutes before making any other
measurements on this port.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
This port must be used when measuring TX (RF) power.
Signals ≤60 mW can be input to the ANT IN connector for all RF measurements except
TX Power.
This port can be selected on the RF ANALYZER, RF GENERATOR, CDMA
GENERATOR, CDMA ANALYZER, CODE DOM, or SPEC ANL screens.
SCOP E MONITOR OUT
This connector provides an external output from the AF analyzer.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
The Scope Tofield in the AF ANALYZER screen determines the source of this signal.
The level is not affected by the front-panel VOLUME knob.
Output impedance <1 kΩ
290
Chapter 9
Connectors
Connectors
SERIAL 9, 10, a n d 11
The serial ports are used to input and output serial data for entering programs, printing
tests results and screen images, and sending test results to a connected controller or
terminal.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
The serial communications settings are defined on the I/O CONFIGURE screen.
SERIAL 9 must be used for serial printing.
The IBASIC controller sends and receives data to the serial ports using address 9 for the
primary port, and 10, 11 for the other ports. For example, to enter data from the primary
serial port into a program variable named SDATA, you could use the following command:
ENTER SERIAL_9;SDATA
To send data from your program out of the primary serial port, you could use the
following command:
OUTPUT SERIAL_9;SDATA
SERIAL 10 can only be configured through GPIB.
SERIAL 11 is reserved for future use with special software that enables remote
operation through a PC.
F igu r e 9-2
Ser ia l P or t P in Assign m en t s
5
1
9
6
Ta ble 9-1
Ser ia l P or t P in Assign m en t s
P in
Descr ip t ion
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD - Carrier Detect
RD - Receive Data
TD - Transmit Data
DTR - Data Terminal Ready
Ground
DSR - Data Set Ready
RTS - Request to Send
CTS - Clear to Send
RI - Ring Indicator
TRIGGER QUALIF IER IN
This input is active when an external trigger qualifier is selected with the Qual Event
291
Chapter 9
Connectors
Connectors
field on the CDMA ANALYZER and CODE DOM screens.
If the trigger is to occur on the TRIGGER QUALIFIER IN signal, select Delayin the
Trig Eventfield and select a delay of 0.0 µs. If the TRIGGER QUALIFIER IN signal is
a qualifier, select a trigger source in the Trig Eventfield.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
Input impedance = 50 k Ω
Input level range = TTL
VIDEO OUT
This connector provides a signal for using an external video monitor. The signal provides
a duplicate of the Test Set’s screen.
Op er a tin g Con sid er a tion s
The CRT’s Video Output drives a multisync monitor at 19.2 kHz (analog). Examples of
this type of monitor include the Electrohome ECM 1410-DMS 14-inch color monitor and
the EVM 1242-P4VID 12-inch monochrome monitor.
292
Chapter 9
Accessories, Manuals, Support
Agilent Technologies Accessories
Agilen t Tech n ologies Accessor ies
Ta ble 10-1
Accessor ies
Descr ip t ion s
Or d er in g
Nu m ber
8935 Samsung CDMA BTS Test Solution
8935 RF Tools Hardware Accessory Kit
E6550A
E6550A
Option 001
8935 RF Tools Kit (CDMA & TDMA)
E6554A
8935 Lucent Base Station Connector Kit
8935 RF Tools Hardware Accessory Kit
E8300A
E8300A Opt
001
Exter n a l Mon itor
The CRT Video Output drives a multisync monitor at 19.2 kHz (analog).
Examples of this type of monitor include the Electrohome ECM
1410-DMS 14-inch color monitor and the EVM 1242-P4VID 12-inch
monochrome monitor.
Agilen t Tech n ologies Ma n u a ls (En glish a n d Oth er )
Ta ble 10-2
Ma n u a ls
Descr ip t ion s
La n gu a ge
Or d er in g
Nu m ber
8935 Series E6380A Manuals on CD-ROM
English
English
English
English
English
English
English
Korean
Korean
Korean
E6380-90027
E6380-90016
E6380-90018
E6380-90019
E6380-90017
E6380-90015
E6380-90073
E6380-90063
E6380-90064
E6386-90002
8935 Series E6380A CDMA Application Guide (paper)
8935Series E6380A Programmer ’s Guide (paper)
8935 Series E6380A Reference Guide (paper)
8935 Series E6380A AMPS Application Guide (paper)
8935 Series E6380A Assembly Level Repair Manual (paper)
8935 Series E6380A GPIB Syntax Reference Guide
8935 Series E6380A CDMA Application Guide
8935 Series E6380A Reference Guide
8935 Series E6386A Samsung CDMA Cellular/PCS Base Station
Test Set Software
Chapter 10
295
Accessories, Manuals, Support
Agilent Technologies Accessories
Agilen t Tech n ologies Test Softw a r e
The Radio Test Software performs automated tests on radios used in
various radio communication systems. Each test package is contained
on an individual memory card.
Ta ble 10-3
Nu m ber
Descr ip tion
E6385A
E6386A
E6387A
E6389A
8935 Series Lucent CDMA Cellular/PCS Base Station Test Set Software
8935 Series Samsung CDMA Cellular/PCS Base Station Test Set Software
8935 Series Nortel CDMA Cellular/PCS Base Station Test Set Software
8935 Series Nortel P-Series Base Station Test Set Software
935 Series Nortel TRU Base Station Test Set Software
E8303A
8935 Series Motorola Base Station Test Set Software
Op tion s
Ta ble 10-4
Or d er
Descr ip t ion
Nu m ber
1D5
High Stability Reference
296
Chapter 10
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Accessor.fm
Accessories, Manuals, Support
Support for Your Instrument
Su p p or t for You r In st r u m en t
Gettin g Help
If you have problems using this Test Set, and cannot find the solution in
these documents or the Help screens, please use one of the following
contacts:
•
•
•
•
•
•
U.S. Call Center: 800 542-4844
Korea Agilent Technologies Direct: (82/2) 769-0800
Canada Agilent Technologies Direct: (800) 387-3154
European Call center: +31 20 547-9990
Test and Measurement Organization on the web.
Parts and service for your Test Set can be ordered by
Cu stom er Tr a in in g
Agilent Technologies offers customers a variety of training materials
and classes that explain the theory and applications of many Agilent
Technologies products. Contact your Agilent Technologies regional sales
office to arrange training for you or your group.
Chapter 10
297
Accessories, Manuals, Support
Support forYour Instrument
Ta b le 10-5
Agilen t R egion a l Sa les a n d Ser vice Offices
United States of America:
Agilent Technologies
Test and Measurement Call Center
P.O. Box 4026
Canada:
Europe:
Agilent Technologies Canada Inc.
5150 Spectrum Way
Mississauga, Ontario
L4W 5G1
Agilent Technologies
European Marketing
Organization
Englewood, CO 80155-4026
P.O. Box 999
1180 AZ Amstelveen
The Netherlands
(tel) 1 800 452 4844
(tel) 1 877 894 4414
(tel) (3120) 547 9999
J apan:
Latin America:
Australia/New Zealand:
Agilent Technologies
Australia Pty Ltd.
347 Burwood Highway
Forest Hill, Victoria 3131
Agilent Technologies J apan Ltd. Agilent Technologies
Measurement Assistance Center Latin America Region
9-1 Takakura-Cho, Hachioji-Shi, Headquarters
Tokyo 192-8510, J apan
5200 Blue Lagoon Drive,
Suite #950
(tel) (81) 456-56-7832
(fax) (81) 426-56-7840
Miami, Florida 33126
U.S. A.
(tel) 1 800 629 485
(Australia)
(fax) (61 3) 9272 0749
(tel) 0 800 738 378
(New Zealand)
(tel) (305) 267 4245
(fax) (305) 267 4286
(fax) (64 4) 802 6881
Asia Pacific:
Agilent Technologies
24/F, Cityplaza One,
111 Kings Road,
Taikoo Shing, Hong Kong
(tel) (852) 3197 7777
(fax) (852) 2506 9233
298
Chapter 10
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Accessor.fm
Error Messages
General Information About Error Messages
Gen er a l In for m a tion Abou t Er r or Messa ges
Information concerning error messages displayed by the Test Set may
be found in one of the following manuals:
•
•
•
•
Agilent Technologies 8935 Programmer ’s Guide
Agilent Technologies 8935 Assembly Level Repair Manual
Agilent Technologies Instrument BASIC User ’s Handbook:
A Beginner ’s Guide to SCPI
The format of the displayed message determines which manual
contains information about the error message. There are four basic
error message formats:
•
•
•
•
Positive numbered error messages
IBASIC error messages
GPIB error messages
Text only error messages
The following paragraphs give a brief description of each message
format and direct you to the manual to look in for information about
error messages displayed in that format.
P ositive Nu m ber ed Er r or Messa ges
Positive numbered error messages are generally associated with
IBASIC. Refer to the Agilent Technologies Instrument BASIC User ’s
Handbook for information on IBASIC error messages.
Exa m p le 11-1
Exa m p le 11-2
P osit ive n u m b er ed er r or m essa ges t a k e t h e for m :
ERROR XX
F or exa m p le:
Error 54 Duplicate file name
or
Error 80 in 632 Medium changed or not in drive
300
Chapter11
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Errormsg.fm
Error Messages
General Information About Error Messages
Nega tive Nu m ber ed Er r or Messa ges
Negative numbers preceding the error messages text correspond to the
error conditions outlined in the Standard Commands for Programmable
Instruments (SCPI). For more information on SCPI, order the following
book,
A Beginner ’s Guide to SCPI Addison-Wesley Publishing Company ISBN
0-201-56350-9 Agilent Technologies P/N 5010-7166
or contact,
Fred Bode, Executive Director SCPI Consortium
8380 Hercules Drive, Suite P3
La Mesa, CA 91942
Phone: (619) 697-8790, FAX: (619) 697-5955 CompuServe Number:
76516,254
Negative numbered error messages take the form: ERROR − X <error
message>
Exa m p le 11-3
F or exa m p le
Error -128 Numeric data not allowed
or
Error -141 Invalid character data
IBASIC Er r or Messa ges
IBASIC Error Messages are associated with IBASIC operation. IBASIC
error messages can have both positive and negative numbers. Refer to
the Agilent Technologies Instrument BASIC User ’s Handbook for
information on positive numbered error messages. Refer to the GPIB
Error Messages section of the Programmer ’s Guide for information on
negative numbered error messages (the error message associated with
a negative number is the same for GPIB errors and IBASIC errors).
Exa m p le 11-4
IBASIC er r or m essa ges t a k e t h e for m :
IBASIC Error: -XX
For example:
IBASIC Error: -286 Program runtime error
Chapter 11
301
Error Messages
General Information About Error Messages
GP IB E r r or Messa ges
NOTE
For the purposes of this documentation, the terms “GPIB” and “HP-IB”
may be considered one and the same.
GPIB Error Messages are associated with GPIB operation. Refer to the
Programmers Guide for information on GPIB error messages.
Exa m p le 11-5
GP IB er r or m essa ges t a k e t h e for m :
HP-IB Error: -XX
or
HP-IB Error
For example:
HP-IB Error: -410 Query INTERRUPTED.
or
HP-IB Error: Input value out of range.
Text On ly Er r or Messa ges
Text only error messages are generally associated with manual
operation of the Test Set. This manual contains information on text only
error messages.
Text only error messages can also be displayed while running the Test
Set’s built-in diagnostic or calibration utility programs. Refer to the
Assembly Level Repair manual for information on text only error
messages displayed while running the Test Set’s built-in diagnostic or
calibration utility programs.
Exa m p le 11-6
Text on ly er r or m essa ges t a k e t h e for m :
This is an error message.
Input value out of range.
302
Chapter11
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Errormsg.fm
Error Messages
General Information About Error Messages
Th e Messa ge Disp la y
During instrument operation, various messages may appear on the Test
Set’s display. Prompt-type messages generally appear on the first line of
the Test Set’s display. General operating and error messages usually
appear on the second line of the display. Some messages are persistent;
they remain displayed until the error condition no longer exists, or until
another persistent message with greater priority occurs. Other
messages are only displayed when the error first occurs; they are
removed when a key is pressed or the knob is turned, or when a GPIB
command is received. Many of the messages are displayed on the
ERROR MESSAGE screen until the instrument is turned off.
Messages that are about error conditions may tell you what to do to
correct the error (turn something off, reduce a field’s value, press a
certain key, and so forth). Messages and prompts are sometimes
accompanied by a beep or warble.
NOTE
Wa r b les a n d Beep s
A warble sound indicates that an instrument-damaging event is
occurring. Beeps often occur only with the first occurrence of the
message. Prompts are generally silent.
Non -Recover a ble F ir m w a r e Er r or
The non-recoverable firmware error is very important. It appears when
an unanticipated event occurs that the Test Set’s firmware cannot
handle. The message appears in the center of the Test Set’s display and
(except for the two lines in the second paragraph) has the form:
Non-recoverable firmware error. Please record the 2 lines of
text below and contact Agilent Technologies through your
local
service center or by calling (800) 827-3848 (USA, collect)
and
asking to speak to the Service Engineer.
‘Address error exception’
at line number 0
To continue operation, turn POWER off and back on.
Follow the instructions in the message.
Unfortunately, you will not be able to recover from this condition. You
must switch the Test Set off and back on. When you rerun the test
where the Error Message occurred, it may not occur again. If it does
reappear, it would be helpful to Agilent Technologies to record exactly
what the configuration of the instrument was when the error appeared
and contact Agilent Technologies.
Chapter 11
303
Error Messages
General Information About Error Messages
Text On ly Er r or Messa ges
Operation errors generally occur when you try to do something the Test
Set was not designed to do. Most messages tell you what to do to correct
the problem, (turn something off, reduce a field’s value, press a certain
key,…and so forth).
Some common messages are listed here:
•
All self tests passed.
The Test Set did not detect any hardware or firmware failures
during its initial self-diagnostics
This message should always be displayed immediately after
instrument turn on.
•
Chan Pwr UNCAL: No Freq or Ch Pwr Fltr cal. Start Chan Pwr Cal.
These messages are displayed when a channel power measurement
is being performed but no valid calibration data exists. The message
is accompanied by an audible tone (beep). Remove power from the
ANT IN or RF IN/OUT connector and select Calibrateunder the Ch
Pwr Calfield on the CDMA ANALYZER screen. Then reconnect the
input signal to proceed.
•
•
ACP UNCAL: No Freq or ACP Offset cal. Start ACP Cal.
These messages are displayed when a channel power measurement
is being performed but no valid calibration data exists. The message
is accompanied by an audible tone (beep). Remove power from the
ANT IN or RF IN/OUT connector and select Calibrateunder the
ACP Calfield on the CDMA ANALYZER screen. Then reconnect the
input signal to proceed.
Tune freq out of range for ACP. Change freq or ACP Offset.
This message is displayed if you try to perform an ACP
measurement or calibration that would cause the Test Set to be
tuned to a frequency out of its valid range (for example, the range
between 1015 MHz and 1700 MHz). Note that although the tune
frequency or channel cannot be set to these frequencies, it could be
possible that an invalid tune frequency would be within the range of
an attempted adjacent channel power measurement (offset and BW).
The message is accompanied by an audible tone (beep).
•
Remove power at ANT IN and RF IN/OUT. Restart calibration.
This message is displayed during channel power or ACP calibration
if a signal is detected at the ANT IN or RF IN/OUT port with an
amplitude high enough degrade the calibration. Remove power at
the ANT IN or RF IN/OUT port, and move the cursor (turn the knob)
to remove the message. The message is accompanied by an audible
tone (beep).
304
Chapter11
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Errormsg.fm
Error Messages
General Information About Error Messages
•
•
Input value out of range.
A number was entered that was too large or small for the selected
field, for example, trying to set AFG1 Freqto 125 kHz.
Invalid keystroke.
You used a key that has no function relating to the selected field,
for example, pressing the On/Off key while the Filter 1field is
selected.
•
•
Option not installed.
You selected a function that requires optional hardware that is
not present.
Turn off either AM or FM settings.
You tried to create simultaneous AM and FM (using any
combination of AFGen1, AFGen2, and the Mod In Tofield). The
Test Set does not provide simultaneous AM and FM.
•
Squelch interrupt overflow. Reset using Meas Reset (press and
release the Shift key, then the Hold key).
The Test Set temporarily interrupts audio measurements when
squelch is first broken to prevent internal switching transients
from influencing measurements (except when using the SCOPE,
SPEC ANL, SERVICE screens). If squelch is repetitively broken
in a period of a few seconds, the duration of measurement
interruption becomes too great, and the Test Set stops
interrupting the signal. Following measurements may be
influenced by transient signals.
Meas Reset clears the data buffer used to generate interrupts,
resetting the normal squelch operation to eliminate transients.
This condition may occur when monitoring low-level off-the-air
signals.
•
•
Cal file checksum incorrect - initializing file.
This error usually occurs after changing the Test Set’s firmware
ROM’s. It is not a problem in that instance, but should not
re-appear during subsequent operation of the Test Set.
One or more self tests failed. Error code: XXXX
An instrument failure was detected when the Test Set was turned
on. (For example, having a stuck front-panel key during turn on.)
The numbered error message corresponds to a binary-weighted
group of errors listed in the *TST Common Command description
in the Programmer ’s Guide.
Chapter 11
305
Error Messages
General Information About Error Messages
•
Change Ref Level, Input Port or Attenuator (if using Hold).
The RF signal level is either too great or too small for the current
input port, attenuator setting, or both. This error often occurs
when trying to make a low-level measurement using the RF
IN/OUT port with the spectrum analyzer. Make the indicated
changes until this message is no longer displayed.
•
•
Change RF Gen Amplitude, Output Port or Atten Hold (if on).
This message appears when the RF Generator ’s Amplitudefield
is set too high when using the RF IN/OUT port or when adjusting
the amplitude with the Atten Holdfield set to On.
The RF IN/OUT port has a lower maximum output level than the
DUPLEX OUT port. Use the DUPLEX OUT port, or reduce the RF
generator ’s level.
If Atten Holdis On, you may be adjusting the amplitude outside
of the allowed range. Change the amplitude
•
Direct latch write occurred. Cycle power when done servicing.
— The SERVICE screen was accessed and one or more internal latch
settings were changed. Turn the instrument off and back on to
reset the latches. (This condition can occur during periodic
calibration.)
306
Chapter11
C:\Spk\Ref\RefGuideRevE\Errormsg.fm
In d ex
- - - -
power
ADC FS field
ADCFS field
AF Anl Input
meaning of, TX power
meaning of, TX power
AF Cnt Gate field
AF Freq field
Sym bols
ADCfs field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
AF generator 1
#Pts field
address
adjacent channel power
output destination, AUDIO
output destination, RF
generator AM modulator,
Nu m er ics
10 MHz REF OUTPUT connector,
600 ohm impedance
adjacent channel power
AF analyzer
output destination, RF
generator FM modulator,
AF Analyzer screen
AF generator 2
A
output destination, AUDIO
output destination, RF
generator AM modulator,
A Only/A-B field
Abort Print field
Abs/Rel field
output destination, RF
generator FM modulator,
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
absolute power measurements,
ac coupling
AFGen1 Freq field
AFGen1To field
AFGen2 Freq field
AFGen2 To
ac level
AC Level field
AFGen2 To field
Agilent Direct assistance
ACP Cal field
ALC
ACP field
ACP Fltr BW field
AF Anl In field
AM
AM Demod
Index
307
In d ex
Analyzer field
audio amplitude
AM Depth
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
AM depth
analyzer, RF
audio frequency counter
AM Depth field
Anl Dir field
AM Mod
audio frequency measurements,
Anl Special field
ANT IN connector
Audio In
AUDIO IN connector
Ampl Hi
Ampl Lo
AUDIO IN LO connector
Audio In Lo field
Ampl Mid
for off-the-air measurements,
amplifier
for distortion measurements,
amplitude
Antenna In field
Audio Out
Instrument Configure screen,
arm
AUDIO OUT connector
Amplitude field
AMPS-TACS signaling decoder,
screen, AMPS-TACS mode
AMPS-TACS signaling encoder,
Arm Meas field
Audio Out field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen, Func
Authenticating modem status,
Auto All
Auto Zero field
Signaling Decoder screen,
arrow down
Auto/Norm field
screen, AMPS-TACS mode
autoranging
arrow up
ANALOG MODULATION IN
connector
ASCII terminal
ANALOG MODULATION INPUT
connector
assistance
spectrum analyzer interference,
Atten Hold field
for modulating RF generator,
Aux field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
analyzer
average power measurements,
averaging
attenuation
308
Index
In d ex
Avg 1-100 field
Signaling Encoder screen,
BW= field
Avg Pwr field
Bypass
B
C
CDMA Generator screen
bandwidth
cables
bandwidth, spectrum analyzer,
calibrating adjacent channel
Base Freq field
Instrument Configure screen,
calibration
base settings
channel power measurements,
Call field
CarFT field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
beeper
carrier feedthrough
Carrier Feedthru field
CD pwr unit field
Beeper field
Instrument Configure screen,
B/I Delay field
Signaling Encoder screen,
SignalingEncoder screen,
bits
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
CD Setup field
CDMA standard
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
CDMA Analyzer screen
Center Freq
Center Freq field
Bursts field
Chan
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Chan Pwr field
Busy/Idle field
Chan Space field
Signaling Encoder screen,
Instrument Configure screen,
Index
309
In d ex
Channel field
Connection Timeout field
connectors
ANALOG MODULATION IN,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
channel numbers
for analyzer/generator
channel power
channel power measurements,
channel spacing, user defined,
CHIP CLOCK 1.2288 MHz
channel standard
NAMPS(MSL, MSM, MSU,
CHIP CLOCK 1.288 MHz OUT
SCOPE MONITOR OUTPUT,
Chn Pwr Cal field
clear
clock
Cont/Single field
Code Domain Measurements –
Continuous Reverse Link
Code Domain Analyzer screen
Code Domain Measurements –
Controls field
code domain phase
Code Domain Power
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
code domain power
code domain timing
Command Escape Character field
Configure Instrument screen
COPY_PL, IB_UTIL ROM
Code Domain Power & Noise,
counter
coupling
310
Index
In d ex
cursor control knob
DC Level field
dc wave
CW RF Path field
Display field
Decimal Equivalent field
Modem Configure screen
See Command Escape
Decoder screen
D
dashes
meaning of, TX power
Data (hex) field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Data Buff
Distn field
decrement
De-emp
measurements, variable notch
De-Emp Gain field
de-emphasis
DSAT field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Data Length field
DSAT/DST (hex) field
Signaling Decoder screen,
De-Emphasis field
default settings
Data Level field
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
data rate
screen, DTMF mode
screen, DTMF mode
DTMF
delay
Data Rate field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Data Source field
delete
DUPLEX OUT connector
Duplex Out field
Instrument Configure screen,
Date field
demodulation
E
Instrument Configure screen,
Edit Mask field
detector
EditPt field
dc coupling
Detector field
encoder/decoder
DC FM Zero field
deviation
Index
311
In d ex
screen, Signaling Decoder
screen
FILE_XFER, IB_UTIL ROM
four dashes
files
meaning of, TX power
Filler (FOCC) field
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Filter 1 field
meaning of, TX power
FP Setup field
Est Rho field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
FRAME CLOCK OUT connector,
Frame Clock Output field
Instrument Configure screen,
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Filter 2 field
Filters
European Call Center, assistance,
filters
Freq
Even Sec In field
Find PN field
Freq (Delta Mrkr) field
Freq (mask) field
Freq (normal marker) field
Freq (Ref Mrkr) field
Freq Err field
EVEN SECOND SYNC IN
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
EVM field
exponents
firmware
Firmware field
Instrument Configure screen,
Ext
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
floating input
Ext Load R field
Flow Control field
FM
Freq Error field
frequency
Ext Mod
Ext Ref In field
Instrument Configure screen,
center, for spectrum analyzer,
EXT SCOPE TRIG IN connector,
FM Coupling field
FM Demod
FM Deviation field
FM Mod
F
frequency error
Frequency Error field
Frequency field
FF at End field
FF at Start field
fields
FOCC
312
Index
In d ex
Signaling Decoder screen, Func
(Gen)-(Anl) (user defined) field
Instrument Configure screen,
HP-IB address
function generator
(Gen)-(Anl) field
HP-IB Address field
HP-IB operation
Instrument Configure screen,
generator, AF
output destination, AUDIO
output destination, RF
generator AM modulator,
Function Generator signaling
screen, Func Gen mode
Function Generator signaling
I
I BASEBAND OUT connector,
I/O Configure screen
screen, Func Gen mode
functional test
output destination, RF
generator FM modulator,
generator, RF
generator, tracking
G
gain
IB_UTIL
between ANT IN and
between DUPLEX OUT and
between RF IN/OUT and
grounded input
IBASIC controller
H
Gain Cntl field
heading
Gain field
help
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
IBASIC Echo field
Hi Tone field
idle
Signaling Decoder screen,
high limit
Gate Time field
IF filter bandwidth
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Gen Dir field
Hold All
IF Filter field
Hold/Norm spectrum analyzer
impedance
Gen Mode field
Holdoff Delay field
horizontal sweep
Gen Special field
Incoming Call Security field
Index
313
In d ex
increment
Input
input
Input Atten field
Instrument Configure screen,
input attenuation
interactions
high-power/low-power
Range Hold and other fields,
RF generator/analyzer, RF
input attenuator
Internal field
Input Gain field
IQ
input impedance
IQ RFOUT
Input Level field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Input Port field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
J
J TACS signaling encoder/decoder,
knob
Instrument Configure screen,
K
keyboard
insertion loss measurements
L
level
keys
Inst Echo field
reference for spectrum analyzer,
Instrument Configure screen
314
Index
In d ex
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Level (div) field
Marker To field
Marker To Peak- field
Marker To Peak+ field
markers
measurement limits
Level (mask) field
limits
measurement reference, setting,
measurement setups
measurements
Lines/Page field
reference, spectrum analyzer,
Lo Tone field
Signaling Decoder screen,
loss
between ANT IN and
between DUPLEX OUT and
between RF IN/OUT and
low limit
spectrum analyzer, center
spectrum analyzer, next peak,
spectrum analyzer, reference
low-level RF power
Lvl (Delta Mrkr) field
Lvl (marker) field
Mask Beep field
Mask Type field
Lvl (normal marker) field
Lvl (Ref Mrkr) field
Lvl field
function generator frequency,
mask, spectrum analzyer
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Meas Intvl field
insertion loss, discrete
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
M
Magnitude Error field
magnitude error measurements,
Main field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Measure field
Signaling Decoder screen,
measurement accuracy
Measurement field
Marker field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Index
315
In d ex
Signaling Encoder screen,
NAMPS-NTACS signaling
Signaling Encoder screen, Func
screen, NAMP-NTAC mode
NAMPS-NTACS signaling
Signaling Encoder screen,
Model field
memory
screen, NAMP-NTAC mode
negative edge
message
Modem Configuration field
Modem Configure screen
Next Peak
No Pk/Avg field
Norm/Delta field
Command Escape Character
Decimal Equivalent field
See Command Escape
Normalize field
Notch
Incoming Call Security field,
Message field
Notch Coupl field
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Message field (FOCC)
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Message/DST field
Signaling Encoder screen,
meter
Instrument Configure screen,
Modem
Initialization/Configuration
notch filter
Notch Freq field
Notch Gain field
Num Avgs field
Modem
Initialization/Configuration
field
Modem Mode field
modulation
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Num of Bits field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Number to Call field
numbers
pre-emphasis
Mod In To field
Mode field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
O
Signaling Decoder screen, Func
Off Time field
N
Signaling Encoder screen,
offset
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
names
frequency, receiver/transmitter,
316
Index
In d ex
frequency, RF
frequency, tracking generator,
Phase Error field
Phase/div field
Offset Freq (Tracking Gen) field
output
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Phse field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Ofs Trnsfer field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Output Port field
Pk Det To field
overpower
On Time field
Signaling Encoder screen,
Pk Hold field
PN Incrment field
PN Offset field
origination attempts (modem),
damage, at ANT IN connector,
PN Setup field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Polarity field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Port/Sweep (Tracking Gen)
Pos/Neg field
oscilloscope
P
PARALLEL PORT 15 connector,
PARALLEL PORT 16 connector,
Parity field
Position field
positive edge
Password field
PCS
power
North American channel
oscilloscope interference
Oscilloscope screen
Peak
peak
peak-
power meter
power-on settings
peak+
Index
317
In d ex
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
reference markers, spectrum
registers
Pre-Emp field
Signaling Encoder screen,
pre-emphasis
R
radio standard
preset state
relative power measurements,
print
release
Print Title field
RAM
printer
Remote Mode field
remote operation
Printer Adrs field
Printer Configure screen
RAM_MANAGER, IB_UTIL ROM
Reset field
RAM_USAGE, IB_UTIL ROM
ramp wave
resolution
random
Printer Port field
printing
bandwidth, spectrum analyzer,
Range Hold field
Instrument Configure screen,
resolution bandwidth, spectrum
recall
Retrys field
saved register with hardware
return loss measurements, swept,
RECC
decoding,
revision number
AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTA
Pwr Gain field
RECC Data field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Ref Level
Pwr Intvl field
RF Analyzer screen
Pwr Scale field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Ref Level field
Ref Mrkr field
Pwr Zero field
Ref Select field
Q
Instrument Configure screen,
Q BASEBAND OUT connector,
Qual Event field
reference
318
Index
In d ex
rms potential
RF In/Ant field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
ROM program
RF IN/OUT connector
8935 Assembly Level Repair
Manual.
ROM programs
RF Chan Std field
for measuring high-power
Instrument Configure screen,
for measuring transmitter
RF Channel field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
RF Cnt Gate field
RF counter
RF In/Out field
Instrument Configure screen,
decoding,
AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTA
RF Display field
RF Level Offset field
Instrument Configure screen,
Instrument Configure screen,
S
RF Gen Freq field
Sample
RF offset
RF Gen Volts field
Instrument Configure screen,
RF Offset field
sampling
Configure Instrument screen,
RF generator
RF output
SAT Freq field
RF power
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
SAT Level field
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
save
RFTOOLS
discrete frequency insertion loss
SA Self Calibration ON/OFF,
swept insertion loss
swept return loss
Rho field
RF Generator screen
Save B field
save register memory allocations,
Save/Recall field
scale
Index
319
In d ex
scientific notation
serial data word
scope
Serial In field
Serial No. field
Signaling Decoder screen, DTMF
mode
Configure Instrument screen,
Serial Port field
Assembly Level Repair
Manual.
SCOPE MONITOR OUTPUT
Scope To field
screens
SECURE_IT, IB_UTIL ROM
settings
Signaling Decoder screen, Func
Gen mode
Send DSAT field
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Send field
Signaling Decoder screen,
NAMP-NTAC mode
Settling field
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
settling time
setups
Signaling Encoder screen,
Send Filler field
signal level
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Send Mode field
signal/noise ratio
Signaling Decoder screen
AMPS-TACS mode
DTMF mode
Signaling Encoder screen,
AMPS-TACS mode
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Send to Hardware
Func Gen mode
NAMP-NTAC mode
Signaling Decoder screen,
AMPS-TACS mode
sensitivity
adverse effects on
Sensitivity field
Serial Baud field
320
Index
In d ex
signaling format
spectrum analyzer
interference when autoranging,
simultaneous AM and FM (not
SINAD
measuring low-level RF power,
Signaling Encoder screen, DTMF
mode
measurements, variable notch
SINAD field
spectrum analyzer bandwidth,
Single/Cont field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
SNR
Signaling Encoder screen, Func
Gen mode
SNR field
Spectrum Analyzer screen
software
Signaling Encoder screen,
NAMP-NTAC mode
source
span
Span field
speaker
Speaker ALC
Speaker Vol field
Index
321
In d ex
Offset Freq (Tracking Gen) field,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
T
Threshold field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
time
Time (marker) field
Time field
Stop DSAT field
Signaling Encoder screen,
Stop field
Spectrum Analzyer screen
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Configure Instrument screen,
squelch
Instrument Configure screen,
effects on spectrum analyzer,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Stop Filler field
Time Offset field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Stop Length field
Time/div field
Squelch field
timebase
SSB Demod
Stop Meas field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
title
Standard field
Signaling Decoder screen, Func
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
TmOfs field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Signaling Encoder screen,
sweep
Total RAM field
frequency range, tracking
Configure Instrument screen,
trace
swept return loss measurements,
comparison, spectrum analyzer,
Signaling Encoder screen,
Start Frame field
Track/Fixed field
tracking generator
, 157
status
Sym field
Signaling Decoder screen,
symbol
Status field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Symbol Frequencies field
Signaling Encoder screen,
322
Index
In d ex
Trig Event field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
twist
Vert Offset field
twist and pre-emphasis
Vert/div field
Twist field
vertical offset
Signaling Encoder screen,
Trig Level field
vertical sensitivity
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
Trig-Delay field
TX Power field
TX Pwr Meas field
TX Pwr Zero
video averaging
voltage
volume
Trigger field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
TX Pwr Zero field
Trigger Pattern (bin) field
Signaling Decoder screen,
Signaling Decoder screen,
TRIGGER QUALIFIER IN
U
W
units
Walsh Chan field
Code Domain Analyzer screen,
TRIGGER/QUALIFIER IN
User Def Base Freq field
Configure Instrument screen,
triggering
user keys
waveform
decoder,
AMPS-TACS/NAMPS-NTA
external, oscilloscope connector,
Waveform field
Signaling Encoder screen, Func
utilities
web site
Hewlett-Packard Test and
Measurement
data collection, transferring
spectrum analyzer self
Tune Freq field
X
tuning
V
turn off code
Z
variable frequency notch filter,
zero reference
Zeroes
version number
Index
323
|
Motorola MILESTONE XT300 User Manual
Maxtor DIAMONDMAX 21 PATA STM3200820A User Manual
Lucent Technologies USS 720 User Manual
Lindy 20983 User Manual
LG Electronics VX9400 User Manual
LG Electronics LG Lifes Good Cell Phone GB170 User Manual
Kenwood KDC X715 User Manual
Kenwood DP M5550 User Manual
Fujitsu MHV2080AH User Manual
Barracuda Networks ST330620A User Manual